User manual | Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide

Modular ICS 6.1
System
Coordinator
Guide
Norstar, Meridian and Companion are trademarks of
Nortel Networks
© Nortel Networks 2003
StandardTele.com
1-800-4 NORTEL
www.nortel.com/norstar
P0603535 02
Printed in Canada
StandardTele.com
StandardTele.com
Table of Contents
Getting started with Norstar 13
Using this guide 13
Emergency 911 Dialing 13
Understanding programming 14
Before you start 15
What you need to do programming 15
Using Buttons 16
Using the buttons under the display 19
The programming overlay 19
A map for using programming 23
Starting and ending a session 27
Ending a session 27
Frequently used programming operations 29
Changing the display time & date 29
Adding or changing a system speed dial 31
Program a name for a speed dial 33
Changing the name of a telephone 34
Changing the name of a line 35
Making changes to Call Forward No Answer 37
Making changes to Call Forward on Busy 39
Making Changes to Do Not Disturb on Busy 40
What would you like to do next? 41
Answering calls 43
Answering calls in Hunt Groups 43
Answering an incoming call 43
Line buttons 44
Rings you may hear 45
Sorting calls by distinctive ring patterns 46
Answering calls at a prime telephone 47
Expanding telephone capacity 48
Using a CAP module 48
Using a KIM in a central answering position 50
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
4 / Table of Contents
Release button 55
Hearing aid compatibility 55
Viewing information about a call on the display 55
Using Call Information for a particular call 56
Displaying Call Information before or after answering 57
Displaying Call Information for a call on hold 57
Making Call Display information appear automatically 58
Changing which information is shown first about a call 58
Picking up a call ringing at another telephone 59
Answering ringing telephones using Directed Pickup 59
Answering any ringing telephone using Group Pickup 60
Changing a telephone pickup g roup 61
Trunk Answer 62
Answering a call using Trunk Answer 62
Answer DNs and Answer keys 63
Creating a Conference Call 64
Disconnecting one party 65
Independently holding two calls 65
Putting a conference on hold 66
Splitting a conference 66
Removing yourself from a conference 66
Listening to a call as a group 68
Canceling Group Listening 68
Using handsfree/mute 68
Answering calls without lifting the receiver 69
Making calls without lifting the receiver 70
Muting the set 70
Changing a regular call to handsfree 70
Changing a handsfree to a regular call 71
Using handsfree 71
Changing handsfree for a telephone 72
Handsfree Answerback 73
Turning Privacy on or off for a call 74
Creating a conference by releasing privacy 75
Making a call private 75
Checking call length using Call Duration Timer 75
Disconnecting by accident 76
Time 76
Making calls 77
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Table of Contents / 5
Choosing a line using a line button 79
Line pools 80
Using a line pool to make a call 81
Programming a memory button with a line pool 81
Making calls from an ISDN terminal 82
Changing how you dial your calls 82
Using Standard dial 82
Using Automatic dial 82
Using Pre-dial 83
When the internal number you called is busy 83
Priority Call 83
Making a priority call 84
Giving a telephone the ability to make priority calls 84
Using Ring Again 85
Time savers for making calls 87
Storing a number on a memory button for Autodial 87
Adding an autodial button 87
Choosing a line for Autodial 88
Using intercom as the line for Autodial 88
Using Last Number Redial 90
Preventing a telephone from using Last Number Redial 90
Using Speed Dial 91
Making a speed dial call 92
Changing and adding System Speed Dials 92
Adding or changing User Speed Dial 92
Using Saved Number Redial 94
Dialing a saved number 94
Blocking Saved Number Redial 95
Handling many calls at once 97
Using Hold 97
Retrieving a held call 97
Holding automatically 97
Listening on hold 98
Holding a call exclusively 98
Using Call Queuing 99
Transferring calls 101
Using the transfer feature 101
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
6 / Table of Contents
Transferring a call 101
Transferring external calls 102
Canceling a transfer 103
Using Camp-on 104
Parking a call 106
Retrieving a parked call 106
Using Call Park 106
Using system-wide call appearance (SWCA) 108
Incoming calls 109
Outgoing calls 111
No free call keys 111
Using Callback 112
Forwarding your calls 113
Forwarding your calls to another Norstar telephone 113
Canceling Call Forward 113
Using Call Forward at your telephone 114
Overriding Call Forward 114
Changing the automatic Call Forward settings for a
telephone 115
Changing Forward no answer 115
Changing the delay before a call is forwarded 115
Forward on busy 116
DND on Busy 116
Call Forward and Voice Mail 117
Line Redirection 118
Turning on Line Redirection 118
Canceling Line Redirection 119
Allowing a telephone to redirect calls 120
Turning the redirect ring for a telephone on or off 120
How Line Redirection is different from Call Forward 122
Using Line Redirection 123
Centralized voice mail and auto attendant 124
Using a centralized voice mail system 124
Communicating in the office 125
Paging 125
Making a page announcement 125
Activating and deactivating the ability to page 126
Creating page zones 126
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Table of Contents / 7
Using Page with external paging equipment 128
Sending messages 128
Sending a message 128
Canceling a message you have sent 130
Viewing your messages 130
Replying to a message 130
Replying to a message using an analog telephone
connected to an ASM 131
Removing items from your message list 132
Removing items from your message list using an analog
telephone connected to an ASM 132
Viewing messages you have sent 133
Using Voice Call 134
Muting Voice Call tones 134
Answering a Voice Call with handsfree 135
Blocking Voice Calls using Voice Call Deny 135
Tracking your incoming calls 137
Using Call Log 137
Call Log options 138
Logging a call manually 138
Enabling and disabling autobumping 139
Viewing your Call Log 139
Viewing a Call Log item 139
Erasing log items 140
Making a call using Call Log 140
Creating a password to your Call Log 141
Changing your Call Log password 141
Deleting an assigned password 142
Programming a telephone to log calls automatically 142
Using external Voice mail 144
Customizing your telephone 145
Finding out what a button does using Button Inquiry 145
Changing the set display contrast 146
Changing the language on the display 146
Programming a feature code onto a memory button 147
Programming feature buttons 147
Erasing a feature button 147
Labeling your set 149
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
8 / Table of Contents
Applying button labelling 149
Business Series Terminals 149
Norstar button caps 150
Default button assignments 150
T7316E Business Series Terminal button defaults 151
T7316 Business Series Terminal button defaults 153
M7310 telephone button defaults 155
M7324 telephone button defaults 157
M7208 and T7208 button defaults 158
M7100 and T7100 button defaults 159
Rules of default button assignment 159
Moving line buttons 161
Changing the type of ring 162
Adjusting the Ring volume 162
Hiding the message or calls indication 162
User Preferences 163
Using User Preferences 163
Changing button programming 164
Changing User Speed Dial 165
Changing Call Log options 166
Changing how calls are dialed 166
Changing the language used on the display 167
Making the display lighter or darker 167
Changing the ring type 167
Programming Hunt Groups 169
Adding or removing members from a group 171
Moving members of a group 172
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group 173
Setting the distribution mode 174
Setting the hunt delay 175
Programming busy line setting 176
Programming the queue time-out 177
Programming the overflow set 177
Setting the name 178
Allowing/disallowing an auxiliary ringer 179
Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group 179
Using Silent Monitor 180
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Table of Contents / 9
Feature notes 183
Using the Hospitality features 185
Hospitality passwords 185
Room/desk information 187
Programming room information 187
Using the room/set programming 189
Programming the alarm feature 191
Using the Administration set to control alarms 192
Using the alarm 193
Canceling an alarm 194
Turning off an alarm 194
Telephone features 195
Installing Business Series Terminals 195
Installing Norstar telephones 197
Naming a telephone or a line 199
Moving telephones 199
Stopping calls from ringing at your telephone: Do Not Disturb
(DND) 200
Stopping calls 200
Refusing to answer a call 200
Canceling Do Not Disturb 200
Using Do Not Disturb 200
Using Background Music 201
Turning Background Music off 201
ISDN PRI and BRI 203
ISDN PRI 203
ISDN PRI features 204
Network Name Display for PRI 204
Name and number blocking for PRI 205
Emergency 911 Dialing 205
Two-way DID 205
Call by Call service selection for PRI 206
Dialing Plan and PRI 207
ISDN BRI 208
Line access from an ISDN terminal 209
ISDN BRI features 209
Network Name Display for BRI 209
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
10 / Table of Contents
Name and number blocking for BRI 210
Service provider features 210
Call Forward 210
Canceling Call Forward 211
Calling the number your calls are forwarded to 211
Automatic Call Back 211
Automatic Recall 211
MCID (profile 2) 212
Network Call Diversion (profile 2) 213
Overlap dialing (profile 2) 213
ISDN BRI terminals 213
ISDN applications for BRI and PRI 213
Videoconferencing and video telephony 213
Desktop conferencing 214
File transfer 214
Telecommuting 214
Group 4 fax 214
Remote LAN access 214
Leased line backup 214
LAN to LAN bridging 215
Internet and database access 215
Using System features 217
Using alternate or scheduled services 217
Preventing certain calls from being made 217
Making additional telephones ring 217
Changing the lines used by outgoing calls 218
Turning Services on and off 218
An example of how to turn on a Service manually 219
Turning Services on and off 220
Viewing the active Services on a two-line display 221
Viewing the active Services on a one-line display 222
Using passwords 224
Using a Basic password 224
Registration password 225
Changing passwords 225
Clearing a Call Log password 226
Hospitality passwords 227
Silent Monitor password 228
Using special telephones 228
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Table of Contents / 11
Direct-dial 228
Changing the direct-dial telephone assignments 229
Hotline 230
Bypassing a Hotline 230
Making a telephone a hotline telephone 230
Control telephone 231
SM Supervisor 232
Using Set lock 232
Changing Set Lock programming for a telephone 233
Using an auxiliary ringer 233
Turning the auxiliary ringer for a telephone on or off 233
Using Host System dialing signals 234
Link 234
Preventing a telephone from using Link 235
Pause 236
Long Tones 236
Programmed Release 237
Run/Stop 237
Wait for Dial Tone 238
Using tone dialing for a call 238
Using your Norstar system from an external location 239
Controlling access to your Norstar system 240
Direct inward system access (DISA) 240
Class of Service (COS) 240
Maintaining security 241
Accessing Norstar remotely over the public network 241
Tones 242
Using Class of Service (COS) passwords 242
Changing your Class of Service 243
General System features 245
Set profile 245
Line profile 245
Pulse or tone dialing 246
Disconnect supervision 246
Hunt Groups 246
Internal numbers 247
Line assignment 247
Target line 248
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
12 / Table of Contents
Line pools 249
Overflow call routing 249
M7100 and T7100 telephones 250
Memory buttons 250
One-line display 251
Prime line 251
Private lines 252
Volume bar 252
Troubleshooting 253
Using the alarm telephone 253
Reporting and recording alarm codes 253
Testing the telephone 254
Testing the telephone display 254
Testing the telephone buttons 255
Testing the speaker in the telephone handset 255
Testing the telephone headset 255
Testing the telephone speaker 256
Testing the power supply to a telephone 256
Common feature displays 257
Glossary 261
Index 279
Backup programming overlays 305
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
/ 13
Getting started with Norstar
Your Norstar digital key system has many powerful features that
can be customized to keep up with changes in your workplace.
Using this guide
The person who is responsible for adding or moving telephones
or making changes to the system is called the system coordinator.
This guide is designed to give the system coordinator all the
information he or she needs to carry out these kinds of jobs.
The first section contains step-by-step instructions about
changing the time and date, deciding how many rings it takes
before a call is forwarded, and other day-to-day programming.
Once you understand these basic steps, you can move on to the
many other features described in the second section of the guide,
and refer to the first section only from time to time.
You can look at the contents page for an overview of the features
that are available, or check the index for specific features or
messages displayed on your telephone.
Emergency 911 Dialing
Emergency 911 Dialing is the capability to access a public
emergency response system by dialing the digits 9 1 1.
Emergency 911 Dialing
State and local requirements for support of Emergency
911 Dialing service by Customer Premises Equipment
vary. Consult your local telecommunications service
provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and
regulations.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
14 / Getting started with Norstar
Understanding programming
When your system is installed, your installer or customer service
representative programs it to work with your telephone lines,
with your private network, if you have one, and with optional
equipment. They customize the system for your office. All
programming is recorded in the Modular ICS 6.1 Programming
Record.
You may want to further customize your system. For example,
you can change how some features work, or adapt the system to
changes in your office. Programming allows you to change
settings that probably need to be updated regularly because of
staff turnover or new business contacts. You can also assign
features and program buttons on individual telephones.
There are four ways to customize and maintain your Norstar
system:
•
Initial programming is performed for you by your installer
or customer service representative. It deals mostly with
how the system interacts with lines, telephones, and other
equipment.
•
Your programming as a system coordinator changes how
features work for the system, as needed. It requires a
System Coordinator password.
•
A Basic programming password is available to allow
individuals other than the system coordinator to make
changes without giving access to sensitive programming
capabilities.
•
Personal programming is available to anyone through the
Feature button on their Norstar telephone. It allows
individuals to change how their telephone works to suit
themselves.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Getting started with Norstar / 15
Before you start
Before you begin programming, plan what changes you want to
make. Record the changes in the Norstar Programming Record
so that you have the information at hand. For example, if you are
going to program system speed dial numbers, fill out the page in
the Norstar Programming Record so that you have all the
numbers and codes handy once you start programming.
What you need to do programming
Programming is performed using a telephone that can show two
lines of information on its display. Examples of telephones with
two-line displays are shown on page 16.
You need a programming overlay to show which buttons to press
when you are performing programming. See The programming
overlay on page 19.
When you use a telephone for programming, it is taken out of
service. This means it is unable to receive or make calls, and the
call forward features do not work. Do not use the main reception
telephone for programming because you may lose incoming
calls.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
16 / Getting started with Norstar
Using Buttons
The two-line telephone you use for everyday calling can be used
for changes and maintenance. Examples of telephones with twoline displays are shown in the illustration.
Sets used for programming and maintenance
T7316
T7316E
M7324
M7310
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Getting started with Norstar / 17
The next illustration numbers the buttons that are used for both
day-to-day communication and programming on the T7316 set.
The following table describes what each numbered area is used
for.
Business Series Terminal programming buttons
1
7
2
5
6
4
3
8
4
9
10 11
1 Display
Shows instructions for everyday calling as well as
for programming.
2 Display buttons
Have a variety of uses. The current use is shown
on the display above each button.
3 Dialpad
Used for dialing numbers when you are making
calls.
For programming, the dialpad is also used for
entering numbers and letters
4 Memory buttons
Dial a number or feature code stored on the
button.
5 Feature button
Allows you to enter a feature code while using or
programming the telephone.
6 Hold button
Puts an active call on hold.
7 Release button
Hangs up an active call or ends programming.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
18 / Getting started with Norstar
8 Volume rocker switch
Turns the volume you hear through the handset
up or down.
During programming this switch is used to adjust
settings, such as for the display contrast.
Mutes the transmitter in the handset.
9 Mute
10 Handsfree
Allows you to speak to and hear a call without
using the handset or headphones.
11 Headset
Activates the headset feature.
This guide uses the icons for Business Series Terminal
T7316E buttons in feature code examples. Your telephone
may have different labels, or the buttons may be in slightly
different locations. Refer to the table below for comparable
Norstar icons
Telephone buttons
²
³
Ã
¨
Business Series Terminals
T7316 and T7316E
Handsfree:
Mute:
Button
description
M7310, M7324
Norstar sets
Feature
ƒ
Handsfree/Mute
©
Hold
˙
Volume Control
√
Release
®
(T7316E)
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Getting started with Norstar / 19
Using the buttons under the display
The three display buttons are used both for telephone features
and programming. What each button does depends on what the
display shows. Some display instructions that you may see when
making changes on the system include OK, CHANGE, or COPY. In
this guide, display button instructions are underlined.
Display buttons
display text
display button command
display button
The programming overlay
When you begin programming, a group of buttons on the
telephone become the buttons for moving through programming
headings and settings. The programming overlay is a paper
cutout that is included with the Programming record. It relabels
the four buttons to name the actions you use during
programming. If you lose the overlay, there is an extra overlay
included in the back of this book that can be printed and cut out.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
20 / Getting started with Norstar
The diagram below shows how the headings are used to navigate
the programming menus.
Services
Press Heading to move up
one level of the menu structure
Routing service
Current heading
Press Back to move
to the previous item
on the same menu
level.
Ringing service
Restrn service
Press Next to
move to the next
item on the same
menu level.
Press Show to move to the next
level under the current heading.
Sched: Night
Programming buttons are active or inactive at different stages of
programming. A button is active (meaning you can use that
option), when the indicator next to it is lit (ª or º).
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Getting started with Norstar / 21
Business Series Terminal programming overlay
Heading
Back
Show
Next
Heading
Back
Show
Next
T7316E programming set
T7316 programming set
Business
Series
Terminals
Programming
Record
Overlay placed over keys
with indicators
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
22 / Getting started with Norstar
Placing the programming overlay on Norstar sets
Norstar Programming Overlay
Heading
Show
Back
Next
Norstar Programming Overlay
Heading
Show
Back
Next
Displays the heading
for the current level
Displays the first setting
within a menu level
Norstar Programming Overlay
Back
Heading
Back
Moves back one item
on the current level
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
Show
Show
Next
Next
PO698666 Issue 02
Printed in Canada
Norstar Programming Overlay
Heading
Moves display one item forward
on the current menu level
P0603535 02
Getting started with Norstar / 23
A map for using programming
The tables on the following three pages show the headings that
display when you move through the display menu after pressing
and entering the password (the
default password is
or
).
²¥¥‚¯öìéí
ë÷éö ÛÜßÝß
õêé‚
ÛÛàÝÛ ¥¥æé÷ä
The default Basic password (
or
) can be used with a limited number of feature
codes, including
and the codes for turning
call services on and off. For more information, see Using
passwords on page 224.
Terminals&Sets
Customize each telephone on the system. You
can change where a call is forwarded, give a
telephone a name, or allow certain features to be
used at a telephone. You can change the button
programming on any telephone on the system.
Lines
Show the active lines. Coordinator can rename
lines.
Services
Turn services on or off: Ringing service,
Restriction service, and Routing Service.
Sys speed dial
Program up to 255 different telephone numbers
so internal users can dial them with a three-digit
code (001-255).
Passwords
Change or erase the password you use for
programming, or the one you use for Call log. On
an XC system, you can change the Companion
portable telephone registration password.
Time&Date
Change the time, date, or both.
System prgrming
Access the headings that define Hunt Groups,
Hospitality services. Enter the BusName, which
displays on caller ID lines.
On a MICS-XC system, access registration
records for Companion portable telephones so
you can disable or enable the sets.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
24 / Getting started with Norstar
System Coordinator user interface
Terminals
& Sets
Show set
Enter digits
or press
LIST.
Capabilities
Fwd no answer
Fwd to
Fwd delay
Fwd on busy
DND on busy
Handsfree
HF answer back
Pickup grp
Page zone
Paging
D-Dial
Priority call
Hotline
Fwd to
Aux. ringer
Allow redirect
Redirect ring
ATA settings
Name
User
preferences
Model
Button
progrming
User speed dial
Call log opt’ns
Dialing opt’ns
Language
Display cntrst
Ring type
Voice path
Restrictions
Set restrictions
Telco features
1st Display
Called ID
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
Intrn #
Extrnl# .... Use prime
line
ATA ans timer
Msg Indicate
# of buttons
B01 ... BXX
CLR TEL#
FEATR
KIM X or CAP X
# of speed dialers
Spd # 255-279
No one answered
Unanswered by me
Log all calls
No autologging
Standard dial
Pre-dial
Automatic dial
Dflt: Handsfree
Headset
Set lock (Partial, Full,
None)
Allow last no
Allow saved no
Allow link
P0603535 02
Getting started with Norstar / 25
Note: Some headings will only show if required by the
selected options for the previous heading.
Lines
Services
Show lines
___
Enter digits or
press LIST
Ringing
service
Restrn
services
Routing
service
Sys speed
dial
(001-255)
Speed dial #
Enter digits or
press LIST
Passwords
Call Log
pswds
Progrming
pswds
Reg. pswd
(MICS-IX, only)
Hospitality
Time&Date
P0603535 02
Name
Sched: Night
Evening
Lunch
Sched 4
Sched 5
Sched 6
Sched: Night
Evening
Lunch
Sched 4
Sched 5
Sched 6
Sched: Night
Evening
Lunch
Sched 4
Sched 5
Sched 6
add/change tel #
Use prime line
Display digits
Name
Show set
Off, Manual,
Auto
Off, Manual,
Auto
Off, Manual,
Auto
Log pswd
Sys admin: 23646
Basic: 22742
Desk pswd: 4677
Cond pswd:None
SM pswd:
745368
Hour
Minutes
Year
Month
Day
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
26 / Getting started with Norstar
System
Prgrming
Hunt Group
Show Group
Member DNs
Line assignment
Mode
Companion
(MICS-XC
only)
Registration
Radio data
Hunt Delay
If Busy
Q Timeout
Overflow
Name
Aux. Ringer
Distnct ring
Registration
Portable DNs
Re-evaluation
Radios
Cells
BusName
Hospitality
Room/desk info
Show set
Service time
Hour
Minutes
Attn attempts
Retry intrvl
Attn duration
Time format
Expired alarms
Alarm
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
Show line ___
Unassigned/
Assigned
Broadcast
Sequential
Rotary
BusyTone/Queue
Show DN
Available/
unavailable
Status
Cell Assignment/
Show radio
Assigned/
unassigned
Show Cell
Cell radios/Cell
nghbrs/
Cell rad nghbrs
Room #
Adm pwd req’d
12 hr/24 hr
Notify set
Use tone
P0603535 02
Getting started with Norstar / 27
Starting and ending a session
As system coordinator the first steps in making any change to the
Norstar system are always the same.
Jan 1
12:00pm
Press
²
¥¥‚¯öìéí
¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ë÷éö
ÛÜßÝß
.
Press
as pressing
Feature:
Password:
RETRY
Terminals&Sets
ë÷éö
. This is the same
.
Press
. This is the same as
pressing
. Press RETRY to re-enter
the password if you enter an incorrect character.
The display shows the first of the seven headings
available for administration programming.
is the password, unless the password has been changed.
Check the Programming Record for the most recent password.
Ending a session
¨
Display digits:Y
CHANGE
Press
to end the session.
End of session
After a few seconds, the time and date reappears
on the display.
¨
The system makes any changes you indicated in programming as
soon as you move away from a setting, either by using the
navigation buttons or by pressing
.
You can see if the changes you made to telephone programming
have taken effect by pressing the UPDATE display key. The
display shows you how many telephones have not been updated.
Press DNs to see the specific extensions where programming
changes have not taken effect yet. Items disappear from the list
as they are updated.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
28 / Getting started with Norstar
Record any changes you make in the Modular ICS 6.1
Programming Record. If there is a problem with the system, the
installer needs to see a history of the changes you have made.
Remember to inform people in your office of any changes you
have made that affect them. For example, you may change
system speed dial codes or change the number of rings before an
unanswered telephone is forwarded.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Frequently used programming operations / 29
Frequently used
programming operations
The following sections highlight the most frequently used
programming operations. To consult these or other programming
operations, see either the Table of Contents or the Index .
Changing the display time & date
Jan 1
12:00pm
Feature:
Press
²
.
¥¥¡ÝßÜ¥¥æé÷ä
ÛÛàÝÛ
õêé‚
ÛÜßÝß
ë÷éö
Press
(which is the same as
Press
Password:
RETRY
(
(
).
) or
)
The passwords can be changed. See Using passwords on page 224 for more
information.
Entering letters and numbers using the dialpad
first press
fourth press
second press
third press
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
30 / Frequently used programming operations
In this example, you are changing the time to 1:30 p.m.
Hour:01
NEXT
Press CHANGE.
CHANGE
Press the dialpad buttons to enter the hour. Use
two digits for all hours. The clock on the display
shows either one or two digits.
Hour:___
CANCL
AM
OK
CHANGE
Hour:01
NEXT
CHANGE
Minutes:00
NEXT
CHANGE
The display prompts you to choose a.m. or p.m.
Press CHANGE and OK to select p.m.
Press NEXT.
Press CHANGE.
Press the dialpad buttons to enter the minutes.
Minutes:___
CANCL
If you are only changing the time and not the date, press
session.
¨
to end your
In this example, you are changing the date to July 15, 1998.
Press NEXT.
Minutes:30
NEXT
CHANGE
Year:01
NEXT
CHANGE
Press CHANGE.
Press the dialpad buttons to enter the year.
Year:___
CANCL
Press NEXT.
Year:02
NEXT
CHANGE
Month:01
NEXT
CHANGE
Press CHANGE.
Press the dialpad buttons to enter the month.
Month:___
CANCL
Use numbers for the months: 01 is January; 12 is December.
Month:07
NEXT
Press NEXT.
CHANGE
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Frequently used programming operations / 31
Day:01
NEXT
Press CHANGE.
CHANGE
Day:___
CANCL
Press the dialpad buttons to enter the day.
Day:15
CANCL
Press
¨
to end your session.
End of session
The clock controls the schedules used for services such as ringing
and routing services.
After a power failure, the clock is behind by the length of time
power was lost. For example, if the power is out for two minutes,
the clock is two minutes behind.
Adding or changing a system speed
dial
You program a speed dial on your Norstar so that anyone in your
office can dial a frequently used number using a three-digit code
(001-255).
To change a speed dial that already exists, follow the same steps.
The new programming overwrites the previous number and
settings.
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press
12:00pm
Press
Feature:
Press
Password:
RETRY
P0603535 02
²
¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
.
.
.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
32 / Frequently used programming operations
Choose a speed dial code
Terminals&Setsˆ
Press ‘ three times.
Sys Speed Dialˆ
Press ≠.
Press
Speed dial #:___
LIST
ââÚ
.
You can pick any system speed dial code between 001 and 255.
Press ≠.
Speed dial #:001ˆ
FIND
Add or change the telephone number
Press CHANGE.
001:No number
CHANGE
Use the dialpad to program the telephone number
that you want to add. The telephone number can be
up to 24 digits long.
001:___
CANCL
OK
001:nnnnnnnn__
CANCL BKSP
OK represented by the row of n-characters shown here.
Your display shows the telephone number, which is
Press OK.
Select a line for the speed dial code
001:nnnnnnnn
CLR
CHANGE
Press ‘.
Press CHANGE to see your options: Use prime line,
Use prime line
CHANGE a specific line (for example Use line: 01), a line
pool (for example Pool code:71), or Use routing
tbl.
Stop pressing CHANGE when the display shows the prime line again.
In this example, the system selects the prime line
Use prime line
CHANGE automatically to dial speed dial code 001. This is
the most common choice.
If you assign a specific line to a system speed dial number, only telephones with
an appearance of that line can use the speed dial number.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Frequently used programming operations / 33
Choose what shows up on the display
Use prime line
CHANGE
Press ‘.
Display digits:Y
CHANGE
Your choices are Yes and No. Yes means the
display shows the telephone number.
Press CHANGE.
Display digits:N
CHANGE
No means the display shows a name for the code.
Program a name for a speed dial
The system has a standard name to display, so it is not necessary for you to
program one. However, if you have chosen not to display the telephone number,
you may want a specific name.
Alpha tagging feature: This feature offers name display for calls coming in over
lines that offer number-only display services.
If you specify a name for a speed dial, and that person calls in on an external line,
the speed dial name you specify acts as the name display for the call if the call
number matches the number in the speed dial list. If the telephone has also been
configured to display Caller ID (Caller ID set) with the name of a caller first (1st
display), then the name you program for the speed dial code is the name that
displays.
For example: If you create a speed dial for the courier company you use, and
assign the name Courier with the following process, when that company calls you,
Courier would appear on the display for the call.
Press ‘.
Display digits:N
CHANGE
Name:Sys Spd Di... Press ≠.
CHANGE
...al 001 ...
This is the name the display shows if you do not
CHANGE change it. Press CHANGE.
Decide the name you want to give to the speed dial
Name:___
--> code.
Press the dialpad button that has the first letter of the name until the display
shows the letter you want.
Press -->.
Name:S
BKSP
P0603535 02
-->
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
34 / Frequently used programming operations
Use the dialpad and --> until you have the entire
Name:S__
<-BKSP
--> name.
The name can be up to 16 characters long, including spaces.
Press # on the numeric dialpad to add spaces.
Press ‘.
Name:SAVINGS BANK
<-BKSP
-->
Press
Name:SAVINGS BA...
CLR
CHANGE
¨
to end your session.
Or you can press –, then ‘ to program another speed dial
number.
End of session
Changing the name of a telephone
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press
12:00pm
Press
Feature:
Password:
Press
RETRY
²
¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
.
.
.
Change the name of a telephone
Press ≠.
Terminals&Setsˆ
Show set:___
LIST
Enter the internal number (DN) of the telephone or
voice mail extension. In this example, the DN is
221.
If the set has already been given a name, it appears after DN: on the display.
Press ≠ then ‘.
221:221ˆ
FIND
Name:221
CHANGE
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
This is the name the display shows if you do not
change it. Press CHANGE.
P0603535 02
Frequently used programming operations / 35
Decide what name you want to give to the telephone number.
Name:___
-->
Press the numeric dialpad button that has the first
letter of the name until the display shows the letter
you want.
Press -->.
Name:J
BKSP
-->
Name:J___
<-BKSP
-->
Use the dialpad and --> until you have the entire
name.
Name:JEAN B
<-BKSP
-->
Press ‘ to use the name you have
entered.
The name can be up to seven characters long, including spaces.
Name:JEAN B
CLR
Press
CHANGE
¨
to end your session.
You can press – once to continue programming this telephone, or
press – twice to return to the Terminals&Sets heading.
End of session
Changing the name of a line
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press
12:00pm
Press
Feature:
Press
Password:
RETRY
²
¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
.
.
.
Change the name of a line
Terminals&Setsˆ
Press ‘.
Linesˆ
Press ≠.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
36 / Frequently used programming operations
Show line:______
LIST
Enter the three-digit number of the line you want
to name. In this example, the line is 002.
This is the name the display shows if you don’t change it.
Line002:Line002ˆ
FIND
Press ≠.
Name:Line002
Press CHANGE.
CHANGE
Decide what name you want to give to the line.
Name:___
-->
Name:L
Press the dialpad button that has the first letter of
the name, until the display shows the letter you
want.
Press -->.
BKSP
-->
Name:L___
<-BKSP
-->
Use the dialpad and --> until you have the entire
name.
The name can be up to seven characters long, including spaces.
Press ‘ to use the name you entered.
Name:LOCAL
<-BKSP
Name:LOCAL
CLR
-->
Press
CHANGE
¨
to end your session.
You can press – once to continue programming this line, or press
– twice to return to the Lines heading.
End of session
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Frequently used programming operations / 37
Making changes to Call Forward No
Answer
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press
12:00pm
Press
Feature:
Press
Password:
RETRY
²
¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
.
.
.
Change where a call goes when there is no answer
Press ≠.
Terminals&Setsˆ
Show set:___
LIST
Enter the internal number (DN) of the telephone or
voice mail extension. In this example the DN is 225.
If the set has been given a name, it appears on the display.
Press ≠.
225:225
FIND
Capabilitiesˆ
Press ≠.
Fwd no answerˆ
Press ≠.
Fwd to:None
Press CHANGE and enter the internal number where
you want the calls to be sent. In this example the
internal number is 221.
CHANGE
You can press CLR to change the destination back to None.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
38 / Frequently used programming operations
Change the number of times the telephone rings before it is
forwarded
Fwd to:221
CLR
Press ‘.
CHANGE
Forward delay:4
CHANGE
Use the CHANGE button to choose the number of
times the telephone rings before it is forwarded.
¨
Your choices are 2, 3, 4, 6 and 10 rings.
Forward delay:3
CHANGE
Press
to end your session.
You can press – to continue programming capabilities for this
telephone, or press – four times to return to the Terminals and Sets
heading.
End of session
Tip - If the Norstar set is a member of a Hunt Group, the
Call Forward no answer feature is overridden and the
Hunt Group call continues to ring until the hunt time has
expired. For more information about Hunt Groups, see
Programming Hunt Groups on page 169.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Frequently used programming operations / 39
Making changes to Call Forward on
Busy
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press
12:00pm
Press
Feature:
Press
Password:
RETRY
²
¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
.
.
.
Change where a call goes when a telephone is busy
Press ≠.
Terminals&Setsˆ
Show set:___
LIST
Enter the internal number, which gets assigned as
the intercom number, of the telephone extension.
In this example, the intercom number is 225.
If the set has been given a name, it appears on the display.
Press ≠.
225:225
FIND
Capabilitiesˆ
Press ≠.
Fwd no answerˆ
Press ‘.
Fwd on busy. . .
Press ≠.
Fwd to:None
Press CHANGE and enter the internal number where
you want the calls to be sent. In this example, the
internal number is 221.
CHANGE
¨
You can press CLR to change the destination back to None.
Fwd to:221
CLR
P0603535 02
Press
CHANGE
to end your session.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
40 / Frequently used programming operations
You can press ‘ to continue programming capabilities for this
telephone, or press – three times to return to the Terminals and Sets
heading.
End of session
Tip - If the Norstar set is a member of a Hunt Group, the
Call Forward on busy feature is overridden and the Hunt
Group call continues to ring until the hunt time has
expired. For more information about Hunt Groups, see
Programming Hunt Groups on page 169.
Making Changes to Do Not Disturb
on Busy
When you are on a call and a second call comes in, your
telephone rings softly to alert you to the second call. You can turn
this feature on or off for each telephone.
Begin the programming session
Jan 1
Press
12:00pm
Press
Feature:
Press
Password:
RETRY
²
¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
.
.
.
Change Do Not Disturb on Busy
Press ≠.
Terminals&Setsˆ
Show set:___
LIST
Enter the internal number of the telephone
extension. This becomes the number for the
intercom button. In this example, number is 225.
If the set has been given a name, it appears on the display.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Frequently used programming operations / 41
Press ≠.
225:225
FIND
Capabilitiesˆ
Press ≠.
Fwd no answerˆ
Press ‘ twice.
DND on Busy:N
Press CHANGE to turn the feature on.
CHANGE
DND on Busy:Y
CHANGE
A second press turns it off again. Press
your session.
¨
to end
Press ‘ to continue programming capabilities for this telephone, or
press – three times to return to the Terminals and Sets heading.
End of session
For more information about Call Forward and similar settings,
see Forwarding your calls to another Norstar telephone on page
113.
What would you like to do next?
Some of the most common programming tasks are listed below.
For a comprehensive list of settings and instructions, see either
the Table of Contents or the Index.
Redirect calls coming in on a line.
See Turning on Line Redirection
on page 118.
Allow individuals to answer calls that are
ringing at another telephone.
See Picking up a call ringing at
another telephone on page 59.
Assign telephones to different zones for
paging.
See Paging on page 125.
Turn the night service on and off.
See Making additional telephones
ring on page 217.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
42 / Frequently used programming operations
Use a Basic password so others can take
care of programming such as changing
user speed dials, changing names, and
changing the time and date.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
See Using passwords on page
224.
P0603535 02
Answering calls
Answering calls in Hunt Groups
Your Norstar system now allows you to establish Hunt Groups
in your system. Hunt Groups are a group of Norstar set DNs
that can be called by a single directory number. The Hunt
Groups feature ensures calls are easily routed to the
appropriate people. You can program:
•
•
•
the members for a Hunt Group
member position within a Hunt Group
how calls are distributed
•
•
how long a call spends looking for available members
what happens if all members are busy
For more information about Hunt Groups see Programming
Hunt Groups on page 169.
Answering an incoming call
There are three indications of an incoming call: ringing, a line
button flashing, and a message on the display. You do not
necessarily receive all three indications for any particular call.
For example, you may have a line that has been set up not to
ring at your telephone. If so, you see only a flashing line
button. There are many possible combinations, depending on
how your system is set up. See Choosing a line using a line
button on page 79 for more information on the use of lines.
If you receive a priority call and your telephone has no free
internal line buttons, you cannot transfer the priority call, you
must accept or release it.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
44 / Answering calls
Line buttons
One line button for each line is assigned to your telephone.
Press the line button to select the line you want to answer or
use to make a call. Having several line buttons gives you
immediate access to more than one line.
³
The M7100 or T7100 sets have two intercom paths which are
used instead of line buttons to answer and make calls. Each set
can be assigned two lines. You can press
to switch
between two calls, one active and one on hold.
What line indicators mean
º
Flashing on and off for
equal lengths of time
There is an incoming call on the line
º
Flashing on and off
more quickly
You have placed a call on hold
º
Flashing on for longer
than off
Someone else has put a call on hold on
that line
º
On, not flashing
You are connected to the call on that
line or the line is in use elsewhere
Off
The line is free
The T7316E telephone displays a set of icons in place of flashing arrows
when it is connected to a system with version 6.1 or newer software. If you
connect a T7316E telephone to a system that is running version 6.0 or
previous versions, the standard line indicators display.
The KIM also displays some of these icons. Note that this piece of hardware
is only supported by version 6.1 and later software.
,
Active call
The line is active and/or you are
connected to this telephone.
Ringing
A call is coming into this line.
Hold
The call on this line is on Hold at this
telephone.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 45
Call forward
The call on this line has been forwarded.
Active button
The feature assigned to this button is
active.
Flash rate indicators for T7316E and KIM icons
On, not flashing
You are connected to the call on that
line or the line is in use elsewhere or the
service indicated is active
Off
The line is free
Flashing on and off for equal
lengths of time
Existing alert rate
Flashing on and off more quickly
(twinkle)
I-hold
Flashing on for longer than off
(blink)
U-hold
Rings you may hear
A double beep every 10
seconds
A call has been camped to your telephone.
A long single ring
There is an external call on the line for you.
A shorter double ring
There is an internal call on the line for you or a
call is being transferred to you.
A brief single ring
A call is being redirected on one of your
redirected lines. You cannot answer this call.
Three beeps descending
in tone
You are receiving a priority call.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
46 / Answering calls
Sorting calls by distinctive ring patterns
When lines, telephones and Hunt groups are configured on
your system, they can be assigned one of four distinctive ring
patterns (DRP). The default for all telephones is 1 and the
default for lines and Hunt groups is None, which is the lowest
priority. The highest priority is 4.
Call ringing: When multiple calls are presented to the
telephone, the call with the highest priority DRP setting will be
the call that rings at the telephone.
Call answering: When multiple calls are presented to a
telephone, and the user picks up the handset, the call with the
highest priority DRP setting is the call that is presented.
Note: External calls always have a higher priority than
internal calls.
Note: If the ring type is changed on a telephone after the DRPs
are set on the line, the line DRPs are overwritten by the
telephone settings. If the DRPs are set for a line after
telephone programming, then the telephone ring
programming is overridden by the line DRP program.
Refer to the Modular ICS 6.1 Installation Guide for
information about setting distinctive ring for lines. If
the call is to a Hunt group, and the Hunt group DRP is
higher than the line DRP, the Hunt group DRP will take
precedence within the Hunt group. Refer to Assigning a
distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group on page 179.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 47
Answering calls at a prime telephone
Each line in a Norstar system can be assigned a prime
telephone. Calls not answered at their normal destinations are
transferred to the prime telephone. The prime telephone is
usually the attendant’s telephone. The installer or customer
service representative programs a prime telephone for a line.
Displays
DND from 221
The person at telephone 221 has forwarded
a call to you using Do Not Disturb.
DND transfer
The system has transferred a call to you from
a telephone with Do Not Disturb turned on.
DRT Line001
Nobody answered this call so the system
transferred it to you.
Someone has camped, parked or transferred
Line001 callback
CALLBACK a call on line 001, but no one has answered
it. Press CALLBACK or the line button to
connect to the call.
Line001 to prime
There is no telephone that can receive a call
on line 001 so the system has transferred it
to you.
Line002>Line157
The call coming in on line 002 was intended
for target line 157. Line 157 is busy, so the
call has come to you.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
48 / Answering calls
Expanding telephone capacity
You can add additional memory buttons to M7324 telephones
using a CAP module and to T7316E telephones using a KIM
(T24 key indicator module). If you add the modules without
identifying them as CAPs (central answering positions) in
programming, the user can program the module buttons as an
expanded memory button set.
However, if you want to designate one or more users to be
central answering positions for your system, you can program
the modules to support lines, and, in the case of the KIM, also
multiple target lines and Hunt group appearances. This
configuration of the KIM is called an eKIM.
Both systems provide similar features and are programmed
using the same headings. These configurations are briefly
described in this section. For details about configuring the
KIM as an eKIM, refer to the Modular ICS 6.1 Installer Guide.
Using a CAP module
A central answering position that uses a Norstar M7324
telephone and a CAP module is programmed as a CAP by your
installer or customer service representative. You can have five
CAPs in a Norstar Modular system. It is best if the CAP is the
prime telephone and direct-dial telephone for the lines and
telephones it serves.
A CAP module is an add-on device that provides 48 extra
memory or line buttons. You can connect one or two Norstar
CAP modules to the telephone to increase the number of lines
it can handle.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 49
When a CAP module is first plugged into your telephone,
some of the module buttons are already programmed to dial an
internal number.
Norstar M7324 set with added CAP module
M7324 telephone
CAP module
Customizing your CAP module
If your installer has programmed the CAP module to be the
central answering position for your system, you can move
external lines onto the CAP module by using
.
See Moving line buttons on page 161.
²¥¡Ú
Any of the buttons on your CAP module that do not select lines
can be programmed to dial internal or external numbers
automatically. You can program features onto CAP module
buttons. See Time savers for making calls on page 87 and
Customizing your telephone on page 145 for information on
programming memory buttons.
Buttons on a CAP module cannot be assigned as answer
buttons.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
50 / Answering calls
Monitoring telephones with the CAP module
The indicators ˆ beside internal autodial buttons on your CAP
module show the status of Norstar telephones.
The indicator is on when the telephone has:
•
•
an active call
Do Not Disturb turned on
The indicator is off when a telephone has:
•
•
no active call
a call on hold and no other active call
Tip - You can send up to 30 messages from a CAP.
Using a KIM in a central answering position
When you deploy a CAP consisting of a T7316E telephone
and one or more KIMs, the modules can be configured as
eKIMs by your installer. If you do not need lines or hunt group
appearances on the KIMs, there is no requirement for any
system configuration. This configuration of the KIM is called
an ordinary KIM (OKIM) and you can install up to nine
modules on a T7316.
On all KIMs, at each telephone you can use the memory
programming feature to:
•
•
provide feature access (Refer to Programming a feature
code onto a memory button on page 147)
provide access to line pools (Refer to Programming a
memory button with a line pool on page 81)
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 51
•
•
provide one-press external autodial (Refer to Storing a
number on a memory button for Autodial on page 87)
configure system-wide call appearances (SWCA) by
assigning SWCA feature codes
Norstar T7316E telephone with added KIM
An extended KIM (eKIM) provides the same functionality as
the OKIM plus the ability to support multiple lines, target lines
and Hunt groups. A T7316E can support a maximum of four
eKIMs. Your system can support a maximum of five CAPS
using eKIMs. Note that this total includes any T7324 CAPs.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
52 / Answering calls
Cold starting the KIM
If your KIM fails, or if you want to erase programming on the
KIM, there are two types of cold start.
TIPs - If you are cold starting an eKIM that has line or
Hunt group assignments, the cold start will erase
current programming, and insert the line appearances,
starting with the top, left button. After all the line
appearances are assigned to lines, the system adds
target line or Hunt Group appearances. If any buttons
are left, the system will populate the buttons with
autodialer assignments.
²¥â to view button assignments after a cold
Use
start.
For both types of cold starts:
1. Unplug and replug the T7316E line cable.
The telephone will restart and all the icons will flash.
When the telephone icons stop flashing, the KIM module
icons start flashing.
2. At this point, do one of the following:
•
KIM single-module cold start
If you just want to cold start an
individual module, on that
module, simultaneously press the
two top and two bottom buttons
on the lower button set, as shown
in the following diagram. The
KIM displays a random pattern of
icons as the KIM resets.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 53
•
KIM multi-module cold start
If you want to cold start all the
KIMs attached to your
telephone, simultaneously
press the top two buttons on the
upper button set, and the
bottom two buttons on the
lower button set, as shown in
the following diagram.
Customizing your KIM module
²¥¡Ú
You can move external lines, target lines or hunt group
appearances onto the eKIM by using
. See
Moving line buttons on page 161.
Any of the buttons on your KIM that do not select lines can be
programmed to dial internal or external numbers
automatically. You also still can program features directly
onto KIM buttons. Refer to Time savers for making calls on
page 87 and Customizing your telephone on page 145 for
information about programming memory buttons.
eKIM button programming for CAP
Any lines and target lines assigned to the T7316E, which
overflow to the eKIM, must be assigned by your installer. You
can, however, use the Coordinator password to assign the
telephone to the hunt groups for which you want to provide an
appearance. Refer to Programming Hunt Groups on page 169
for information about programming hunt group appearances.
Designating features or autodial numbers to the eKIM buttons,
can be programmed using the Button progrmng, which is
found under User Preferences under Terminals&Sets.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
54 / Answering calls
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See A map for using programming on page 23 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
.
2. Press
(the default System Coordinator
password). Terminals&Sets displays.
3. Press ≠. Show set: displays.
4. Enter the DN number of the T7316E which is attached to
the eKIM you want to program, then press OK.
5. Press ≠. Capabilities displays.
6. Press ‘ two times until the display shows User
preferences.
7. Press ≠. Model displays (7316E+<n>KIM).
8. Press ‘. Button progrming displays.
9. Press the KIM softkey for the KIM for which you want to
program buttons.
Note: If no KIM softkeys appear, it means the KIM was not
configured as a CAP in programming.
10. Press ‘ until you find the button you want to
program.
11. Press TEL# to enter an autodial number, or press FEATR to
enter a feature code and feature programming. To make the
button blank, press CLR.
Monitoring telephones from the KIM
The indicator icons beside the buttons on your KIM show the
status of system telephones or lines assigned to the KIM. Refer
to What line indicators mean on page 44 for a description of
the T7316E and KIM icons.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 55
Release button
¨
¨
Pressing
down.
ends a call. You do not have to put the receiver
also ends feature programming.
¨
²
While you are on a call, do not press
to end a feature you
are using. If you do, you disconnect the call. Use
instead.
Hearing aid compatibility
The receivers on all Norstar telephones and Business Series
Terminals are compatible with hearing aids as defined in the
FCC rules, Part 68, section 68.316. Not all hearing aids are
optimized for use with a telephone.
Viewing information about a call on the
display
If you subscribe to Call Display services from your local
telephone company, one line of information about an external
caller is displayed after you answer. Depending on the setting,
and the external information available, either the caller’s name
or telephone number is displayed.
When you transfer an external call to another Norstar user, this
information is displayed on the target telephone.
Call Display information becomes available between the first
and second ring of an incoming call. If you answer before the
Call Display information is available on your display, and you
press
, you see only the line number or line
name.
²¡ÚÚ
To use logging features with Call Display, see Using Call Log
on page 137.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
56 / Answering calls
²¡ÚÚ
Using Call Information for a particular call
Call Information allows you to see information about
incoming calls. This information is more detailed than the Call
Display information you can receive automatically. For
external calls, you can display the name of the called-party
telephone, telephone number, and the line name. For an
internal call, you can display the name of the called-party
telephone and the internal number of that telephone. You can
see information for ringing, answered, or held calls.
Call Information is available for calls even if they have been
transferred, forwarded or rerouted in some way.
Names and numbers for external calls are displayed only if you
have subscribed to Call Display services from your telephone
company.
Tip - Call Log displays the same information as Call
Information, along with the date and time of the call, and the
number of times the caller called.
Once you answer a call, new calls coming in on lines
configured with CLID to telephones with CLID allowed,
present the prompt: LineXXX Calling for two rings, and then
the CLID of the caller will display for three seconds (XXXXX).
If the call is being forwarded, the CLID will also display the
number from which the call was forwarded (XXXXX>YYY).
This transient prompt will disappear if you press a
programmed feature key, external autodialer, answer key,
feature key, line key, intercom key, any dialpad key, shift key
(M7310), or handsfree key. As well, an incoming Priority call
or Voice call will clear the display and display the information
for the Priority or Voice call.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 57
Displaying Call Information before or after
answering
To find out who is calling or to display information about your
current call:
1. Press
²¡ÚÚ
£
.
2. Press
or VIEW to display more information about an
external call.
Call Display information becomes available between the first
and second ring of an incoming call. If you answer before the
Call Display information is available on your display, and you
press
, you see only the line number or line
name.
²¡ÚÚ
Displaying Call Information for a call on hold
1. Press
²¡ÚÚ
. The display reads ˆSelect a call.
2. Select the line on hold. Information about the call is
displayed.
£
3. Press
or VIEW to display more information about an
external call.
²¡ÚÚ
Tip - If your telephone automatically displays Call Display
information for a call, you still need to press
before you can press
or VIEW to display more
information about the call.
£
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
58 / Answering calls
Making Call Display information appear
automatically
Each telephone that rings for an external line can display Call
Display information for that line. After the call is answered,
Call Display information is always shown at the telephone that
answered the call. Your installer or customer service
representative can program telephones to have automatic Call
Display.
This feature is not available to ISDN terminals.
Changing which information is shown first
about a call
Depending on the services you subscribe to, Call Display
information may contain up to three parts:
•
•
•
the name of the caller
the number of the caller
the name of the line in your system that the call is on.
For each telephone, you can determine which information is
displayed first.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 59
5. Press ‘ four times.
6. Press ≠.
7. Choose a setting at 1stDisplay: using the CHANGE button.
The choices are Name, Numbr or Line.
You may see Unknown name or Unknown number on the
display if the information is not available from your telephone
company. You may see Private name or Private number
on the display if the caller blocks that information.
Picking up a call ringing at another
telephone
You can pick up a call ringing at another telephone by using
Directed Pickup or Group Pickup.
Answering ringing telephones using Directed
Pickup
You can answer any telephone that is ringing in your Norstar
system, except private lines.
1. Press
²àß
.
2. Enter the internal number of the ringing telephone.
To use Call Pickup (Directed Pickup), the telephone must be
ringing. If, for example, the auxiliary ringer is ringing, but the
call is not ringing at a telephone, the call cannot be answered
using Directed Pickup. It must be answered normally at a
telephone that has a flashing indicator for the call, or by using
Trunk Answer. You can answer a call that is ringing because
someone has transferred the call to a telephone and the call is
ringing on an intercom button.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
60 / Answering calls
Tip - Directed pickup can retrieve calls that are ringing on an
Answer DN. While you may enter the internal number of the
telephone you hear ringing, it may be calls from another
telephone you are answering.
Privacy issue
Target lines can be designated as Private
(default is Public), however, such features as Call
Pickup can still answer these lines at remote
telephones. Only physical, analog lines set to
Private are blocked from Call Pickup.
Answering any ringing telephone using Group
Pickup
Your Norstar system can be divided into nine pickup groups.
If you are a member of a pickup group, you can pick up a call
that is ringing at any telephone in your pickup group.
1. Press
²àÞ
.
Group Pickup cannot be used to retrieve a camped call.
If there is more than one incoming call at a telephone in a
pickup group, a call ringing on an external line is answered
first, followed by calls on the prime line and, finally, calls on
internal lines.
Tip - A Hunt Group call ringing at a Norstar set DN that is
also a member of a call pickup group can be picked up by any
Norstar set in that call pickup group. For more information
about Hunt Groups, see Programming Hunt Groups on page
169.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 61
Changing a telephone pickup group
Telephones can be put into and taken out of pickup groups.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press ‘ five times.
6. Press CHANGE at Pickup grp: to assign the telephone to
pickup group (1-9) or remove it from a pickup group
(None).
Displays
Already joined
You are already connected to the telephone
that made the call you are trying to pick up.
This can happen if you are on a call to a
co-worker and your co-worker dials the
number of a telephone in your pickup group,
and you attempt to pick up that call.
Pickup denied
There is no call that you can pick up or the
ringing call was answered.
You have tried to pick up a call on someone
else’s private line.
Pickup:
Enter the internal number of the telephone
that is ringing. (You may use an internal
autodial button to do this.)
¨
If you decide not to answer a ringing call after
activating Directed Pickup, press
.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
62 / Answering calls
Trunk Answer
The Trunk Answer feature allows you to answer a ringing call
anywhere in the system from any telephone in the system. The
line you are answering does not have to appear or ring at the
telephone you are using.
Trunk Answer works only with calls that are ringing on lines
for which a Ringing Service schedule is active and if Trunk
Answer is enabled by your installer or customer service
representative.
Answering a call using Trunk Answer
Press
²¡ââ
.
Tip - If there is more than one incoming call on lines in a
Ringing Service, the Trunk Answer feature picks up the
external call that has been ringing the longest.
Displays
Line denied
You have tried to pick up a call on someone
else’s private line.
Pickup denied
The call that is ringing is on a line that is not
in a Ringing Service.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 63
Answer DNs and Answer keys
You can use an Answer DN button to monitor calls on another
telephone. The calls that come to the monitored telephone that
provide an appearance on the Answer DN button are
determined by the system-wide Anskey setting.
Answer DN buttons are useful for attendants who monitor
incoming calls for one or several other people. For example, a
secretary may have appearances for three different bosses on
her answer buttons. Once a call for boss A is answered by the
secretary, the appearance stops at that set. This allows for
another (simultaneous) call to come in on the same line. The
same is true for boss B and boss C. When incoming call traffic
becomes high, the calls can then be routed to a Hunt Group to
optimize call handling. For more information about Hunt
Groups, see Programming Hunt Groups on page 169.
Answer DNs are assigned under Terminals&Sets under
Lines, Line Assgn. This setting assigns the DN of another
telephone to one of your telephone buttons.
Answer keys are assigned under System prgrming, Featr
settings. This setting determines which calls will appear at
the bottom. There are three levels: Basic, Enhanced, and
Extended.
You need an Installer password to do this programming. See
the Modular ICS 6.1 Installer Guide for more information.
•
ISDN terminals cannot be assigned Answer DNs to
monitor other telephones, but ISDN terminals can be
monitored.
•
You cannot make calls using Answer DNs.
If more than one call is ringing at a telephone, the first call
appears on the attendant Answer DN button. Any subsequent
calls appear on intercom buttons, if they are available.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
64 / Answering calls
Tip - More than one attendant may have an Answer DN
button for the same telephone. This allows two or more
attendants to handle calls for a busy person.
Each telephone can handle calls for up to eight other people
using a separate Answer DN button for each person.
Creating a Conference Call
You can talk to two people at once.
²Ü
1. Make sure you have two calls, one active and one on hold.
2. Press
.
3. Press the appropriate button to retrieve the held call.
This is automatic on the M7100 and T7100 telephones.
You can create a conference when you are on a call.
²Ü
1. Make a second call.
2. Press
.
3. Press the button where the first call is on hold to create a
conference.
Only the person who established the conference can process
the conference by using the procedures described in this
section.
Tip - You can create a conference by releasing privacy on a
call. See Turning Privacy on or off for a call on page 74.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 65
Disconnecting one party
You can disconnect one party from a conference and continue
talking to the other.
You can activate this feature on all Norstar and Business
Series terminals except for M7100 or T7100 models.
1. Press the line button of the call that you want to disconnect.
The call that you want to keep is automatically put on hold.
2. Press
¨
. The call is disconnected.
3. Press the line button of the held call to speak to the
remaining person.
²£Ü
¨
³
On a T7100 or on an M7100 set:
1. Press
, to place one caller on hold. Press
again, to put the caller you want to keep on hold.
2. Press
3. Press
³
. The call is disconnected.
to speak to the remaining party.
Independently holding two calls
For all telephones except the M7100 and T7100 sets, you can
put the two people in a conference call on hold independently
so that they cannot talk to each other.
1. Press the line button of one person. The other person is
automatically put on hold.
2. Press
³
. The second person is put on hold.
You can re-establish the conference.
²Ü
1. Take one call off hold.
2. Press
.
3. Take the other call off hold.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
66 / Answering calls
Putting a conference on hold
³
³
You can put a conference on hold, allowing the other two
people to continue speaking to each other by pressing
.
You can reconnect to the conference by pressing either of the
held line buttons. For the M7100 telephone, press
.
Splitting a conference
You can talk with one person while the other person is on hold.
You can activate this feature on all Norstar and Business
Series terminals except for M7100 or T7100 models.
1. Press the line button of the person you want to speak to.
The other person is automatically put on hold.
On an M7100 or a T7100 set:
1. Press
2. Press
²£Ü
³
. The first party is on hold.
, if necessary, to switch parties.
You can re-establish the conference.
1. Press
²Ü
.
2. Take the held call off hold. This is not necessary.
Removing yourself from a conference
You can remove yourself from a conference, and connect the
other two callers through your Norstar system.
1. Enter the Transfer feature code
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
²àâ
.
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 67
When you remove yourself from a conference using the
Transfer feature, and both callers are from outside your
system, one of the callers must have called you on a disconnect
supervised line, or the call is be disconnected.
Displays
3 parties only
You are trying to add a fourth party to your
conference call, or to join two conferences
together. Release one call from the
conference before adding another, or keep
the two conferences separate.
Conf. on hold
You have put a conference call on hold.
Conference busy
You have tried to make a conference call,
but your system is already handling its
maximum number of conference calls.
Line001
You are on a conference with the two lines
or telephones shown. You can drop out of
the conference and leave the other two
parties connected (Unsupervised
Conference) by pressing TRANSFER or by
entering the Transfer feature code.
221
TRANSFER
Press held line
You have activated the Conference feature
with one call active and another on hold.
Press the line button for the call on hold to
bring that person into the conference.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
68 / Answering calls
Listening to a call as a group
²¡âÛ
To allow people in your office to listen in on a call using
Group Listening, press
.
You hear the voice of the caller through the speaker of your
telephone. Continue to speak to the caller through the
telephone receiver. The microphone of your set is off, so the
caller does not hear people in your office.
Canceling Group Listening
²£¡âÛ
Group Listening is canceled automatically when you hang up
or when you press
.
¨
Tip - Keep the receiver away from the speaker, or you may
hear feedback. The higher the volume, the more the feedback.
Press
to prevent feedback when hanging up.
Using handsfree/mute
The ability to use handsfree must be turned on or off for each
telephone. The type of handsfree can be changed. Refer to
Changing handsfree for a telephone on page 72.
Handsfree must be set to Std or Auto in system programming
for a telephone to be able to use a headset. This programming
is performed by someone with the Installer password.
If the telephone is set to Auto, the next incoming call defaults
to the voice path used by the last call. For instance, if you
answered your last call using the headset button, the next call
will automatically default to the headset if you do not make
any changes before answering the call. If you plug in a
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 69
headset, the telephone will automatically switch the voice path
to headset. This will not change the mute status of the call. You
can also change the voice path by choosing either the
handsfree or headset key.
T7316E voice path features: The T7316E telephone must be
set to Auto to allow activate the handsfree, which is located
under the dial pad, beside the mute and headset keys.
Answering calls without lifting the receiver
1. Press the line button for the ringing call.
This step is not necessary if you have a prime line assigned
to your telephone.
2. Press the handsfree button. The internal microphone and
speaker of the telephone automatically turn on.
Note: The T7316E telephone has a handsfree button located
below the dialpad. This button only works if the
telephone is wired to a system running version 6.1 or
newer software, and Handsfree is set to Auto.
Handsfree is not available for M7100 or T7100 telephones.
Tip - Direct your voice toward the telephone. The closer you
are to the telephone, the easier it is for the microphone to
transmit your voice clearly to your listener.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
70 / Answering calls
Making calls without lifting the receiver
1. Press the handsfree/mute button. If you do not have a
prime line assigned to your telephone, press a line button.
The internal microphone and speaker of the set are
automatically turned on.
Note: The T7316E telephone has a handsfree button located
below the dialpad. This button only works if the
telephone is wired to a system running version 6.1 or
newer software, and Handsfree is set to Auto.
2. Dial your call.
3. Speak normally.
Muting the set
1. Press the handsfree/mute button to switch off the
telephone microphone so that you can speak privately to
someone in your office while you are on a handsfree call.
2. Press the button labeled handsfree/mute to turn the
microphone back on again and continue your call.
Note: The T7316 and T7316E telephones have a mute button
located below the dialpad. Refer to the T7316 and
T716E user cards for specifics about using this button.
Changing a regular call to handsfree
1. Press the handsfree/mute button.
Note: The T7316E telephone has a handsfree button located
below the dialpad. This button only works if the
telephone is wired to a system running version 6.1 or
newer software.
2. Hang up the receiver.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 71
Changing a handsfree to a regular call
Lift the receiver.
Using handsfree
On models with separate handsfree and mute buttons:
•
The indicator next to the handsfree button is solid when
you handsfree is active and off when the telephone is set to
handset or headset.
•
The indicator next to the Mute button blinks when you
mute the microphone and turns off when the microphone
is open.
Note: Other models of telephones have only one button for
both functions. In this case, when the telephone is on
handsfree and the microphone is on, the light is solid. If
the telephone is on handsfree and the microphone is off
(mute), the light flashes.
Wait for your caller to finish speaking before you speak. The
microphone and speaker cannot both be on at once. The voice
of your caller may be cut off if you both speak at the same
time. Noises such as a tapping pencil could be loud enough to
turn on your microphone and cut off the incoming sounds.
To prevent a possible echo, keep the area around your
telephone free of paper and other objects that might screen
your microphone. Turning down the microphone volume —
press the left end of
while speaking — prevents
echoes. When you change the volume level, both the
microphone and speaker volume are adjusted. This is needed
in order to prevent feedback problems.
Ã
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
72 / Answering calls
Place the telephone so that any unavoidable local noise, such
as an air conditioner, is behind it. This limits the amount of
disruptive background noise.
Tip - In open-concept environments, use the receiver when
handsfree communication is not necessary or when you need
privacy during a call. Another option is to use a headset.
Changing handsfree for a telephone
You can program the type of handsfree used with each
telephone or activate handsfree answerback.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press ‘ three times.
6. Choose a setting at Handsfree: using the CHANGE button.
There are three ways to set handsfree for a telephone:
Handsfree is not available to the telephone.
Handsfree:None
CHANGE
A standard version of handsfree described
Handsfree:Std
CHANGE Using handsfree/mute on page 68. Not
available for T7316E telephones.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 73
Need Handsfree
This prompt appears if you attempt to use
handsfree or headset and the telephone not
been configured with Auto under Handsfree.
You can make or answer a call without
Handsfree:Auto
CHANGE having to pick up the receiver or press the
button marked handsfree/mute. The internal
microphone of the telephone and the
speaker turn on automatically when you
press a line or intercom button to make or
answer a call.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
Both Auto and Standard handsfree allow you to use a headset
with a Norstar telephone or a Business Series Terminal.
A handsfree/mute button is automatically assigned to a
Norstar telephone that is programmed with handsfree and is
always located in the lower right-hand corner of the numeric
dialpad.
For T7208 and T7316 telephones, this button is a handsfreeonly button. The mute button is located under the dial pad.
The handsfree setting for T7316E only displays Auto or None.
The handsfree button on this telephone is located under the
dialpad. If Handsfree is set to None, the handsfree button
does not function. Also, if the T7316E is attached to a system
with software older than version 6.1, it acts like the T7316
telephone, and the handsfree button is not active.
Handsfree Answerback
Handsfree Answerback allows you to answer a voice call
without lifting the receiver.
This feature is always turned off for M7100 or T7100
telephones.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
74 / Answering calls
You can turn handsfree answerback on or off for a telephone
that is programmed to use handsfree.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press ‘four times.
6. Choose a setting (Yes or No) at HF answerback: using the
CHANGE button.
Turning Privacy on or off for a call
²¡Ü
Lines in your system can be configured to have automatic
privacy. If a line is not programmed with privacy, anyone with
the line assigned to their telephone can join your call by
pressing the line button. If a line is programmed with privacy,
only one person at a time can use the line.
Privacy control cannot be used on internal or conference calls.
When another telephone joins a call, the participants on the
call hear a tone, and a message appears on the Norstar display.
You cannot join a call without this tone being heard.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Answering calls / 75
Creating a conference by releasing privacy
If a line is programmed with privacy, you can turn privacy off
to allow another person with the same line to join in your
conversation and form a conference. All the rules applicable to
a conference apply except there is only one line in use, instead
of the usual two. This means that you cannot split a conference
set up using Privacy.
1. Press
²¡Ü
.
2. Tell the other person to press the line button and join your
conversation.
Only two Norstar or Business Series Terminal telephones, in
addition to the external caller, can take part in this kind of
conference.
Making a call private
²¡Ü
If a line is programmed not to have privacy, you can turn
privacy on for a call, preventing other people with the same
line from joining your conversation.
Checking call length using Call Duration
Timer
²àà
With this feature you can see how long you spent on your last
call, or how long you have been on your present call.
Displays
221 02:47
P0603535 02
The display shows the last call you made, or
the current call, and the total elapsed time.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
76 / Answering calls
Line001 01:45
You parked your last call. The display shows
the period the call was parked. This display
only shows when the call is active at, or has
just been released by, your telephone.
Disconnecting by accident
If you accidentally drop the receiver back into the telephone
cradle while answering a call, you can quickly retrieve the call.
Pick up the receiver again or press the button labeled
handsfree/mute within one second to be reconnected to your
call.
Time
²¡âÜ
Use this feature to display the current date and time while you
are on a call.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Making calls
There are many ways to make a call, depending on the
programming and the type of call, as follows:
•
Pick up the receiver and dial. The Norstar system supports
three methods of dialing. See Changing how you dial your
calls on page 82.
Pick up the receiver, press a line button, and dial (if the call
is not on your prime line).
Press the button labeled handsfree/mute and dial to talk
without using the receiver. See Using handsfree/mute on
page 68.
Press the button labeled handsfree/mute, then press a line
button, and dial to talk without the receiver if the call is not
on your prime line.
Press a line button and dial to talk without the receiver if
Automatic handsfree is assigned to your telephone.
Use one of the features that make dialing easier. See Time
savers for making calls on page 87.
•
•
•
•
•
Displays
The telephone you have called has no
221 busy
PRIORITY
LATER internal lines available. Press LATER to use
the Ring Again or Message features or press
PRIORITY to make a priority call.
9__
QUIT
BKSP
95551234
You are dialing using Pre-dial. To erase an
incorrect digit, press the left end of
or BKSP . When the number is
complete, select a line or lift the receiver.
Ã
This prompt remains on your display as long
TRANSFER as you are on a call you have dialed. To
transfer the call, press TRANSFER .
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
78 / Making calls
Already joined
Your telephone is already connected to the
telephone you are trying to call. Check your
active line buttons, and return to that call.
Calling 221
PRIORITY
Wait for the telephone to be answered. If no
LATER one answers, press LATER to use the Ring
Again (page 85) or Message (page 128)
feature, or press PRIORITY to make a priority
call.
Can't ring again
You cannot use Ring Again on your current
call. You can only use Ring Again while you
have a busy signal on an internal call or line
pool request or while an internal call is
ringing.
The telephone you are calling has Do Not
Do not disturb
PRIORITY
LATER Disturb turned on. Press LATER to use the
Ring Again or Messages features, or press
PRIORITY to make a priority call.
Expensive route
You have dialed a number, but the least
expensive route that the system is
programmed to use is busy. Unless you
release the call, it goes through on a more
expensive route.
Hidden number
The last number you dialed or the number
you saved for Saved Number Redial was a
speed dial number that displayed a name
rather than the number. The number is dialed
correctly, but you cannot see it.
Line denied
You have attempted to use the private line
assigned to another user.
Line001
Enter the digits of the number you want to
TRANSFER dial.
No last number
You have not dialed an external telephone
number since the last power interruption or
system reset.
No line selected
Either you have no prime line or your prime
line is busy. Select a line manually before
dialing.
Not in service
You have entered the number of a telephone
that is not in service.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Making calls / 79
The telephone you have called is on another
On another call
LATER call. Press LATER to use the Ring Again or
Message features.
Restricted call
Ring Again?
YES
NO
The call you are trying to make has been
restricted in programming. A possible reason
is time-of-day restrictions on certain calls.
Press YES to use Ring Again. Press NO to
EXIT send a message. See Sending messages on
page 128 and Turning on Ring Again on
page 86.
Select a line
Either you have no prime line, or the prime
line is in use, or the line programmed for an
autodial number, speed dial number, or
Hotline is in use. Select a line and dial again.
Send message?
YES
NO
Press YES to send a message. See
Messages.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
Choosing a line using a line button
You have one line button for each line assigned to your
telephone. Press the line button to select the line you want to
answer or use to make a call. Having several line buttons
allows you immediate access to more than one line.
The M7100 and T7100 telephones each have two intercom
paths which are used instead of line buttons to answer and
make calls. Each set can be assigned two lines. You can press
to switch between two calls, one active and one on hold.
³
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
80 / Making calls
Line pools
A line pool is a group of external lines that can be shared by
many telephones. You can use a line in a line pool to make an
external call.
The MICS system can have 15 non-PRI line pools and a
maximum of four PRI line pools, depending on the hardware
and profile configuration for your system. A telephone can be
programmed to access any number of line pools. You can have
several different line pools for your system, each one giving
you access to a different set of external lines. It is one way of
sharing lines across telephones in a system.
A line pool access code is a number you dial to get a non-PRI
line pool. The access code can be up to four digits long. Your
installer or customer service representative programs the line
pool access codes and gives each telephone access to a line
pool.
PRI line pools are accessed using destination codes.
Destination codes differ from line pool codes, in that PRI line
pools are assigned to specific routes that are then assigned a
destination code. Destination codes can also be assigned to
schedules, so that different pools are used at different times of
the day.
Everyone in the office should have a list of the line pool access
codes and destination codes for the line pools their telephones
can use.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Making calls / 81
Using a line pool to make a call
Use this process to make a line pool call:
1. Press
²ßÝ
.
2. Enter a line pool access code or destination code.
If you have a free internal line, you can make a call using a line
pool without entering the feature code first.
1. Select an internal line (intercom).
2. Dial the line pool access code or destination code.
Tip - If no lines are available in the line pool, you can use Ring
Again at the busy tone. You are notified when a line in the line
pool becomes available. See Using Ring Again on page 85.
Programming a memory button with a line pool
When you program a button with the line pool feature code,
you must enter a line pool access code or destination code after
the feature code. The programmed line pool button accesses a
specific line pool, not the line pool feature. See Programming
feature buttons on page 147 for more information.
If you program a button with an indicator to access a line pool,
when all the lines in a line pool are busy, the indicator for the
line pool button turns on. The indicator turns off when a line
becomes available.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
82 / Making calls
Making calls from an ISDN terminal
ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys as do
Norstar telephones. To make an outgoing call from an ISDN
terminal, access an external line by entering a line pool code
or by using the ARS feature.
Changing how you dial your calls
To change how how you dial your calls, use this feature:
1. Press
2. Press
3. Press
²¥¡Û
£
³
.
or NEXT until the dialing mode you want appears.
or OK to select the displayed dialing mode.
The dialing modes feature code cannot be programmed onto a
memory button.
Using Standard dial
Standard dial allows you to make a call by selecting a line and
dialing the number. If you have a prime line, it is selected
automatically when you lift the receiver or press the handsfree
button.
You cannot use Standard dial on an M7100 or a T7100
telephone unless you pick up the receiver first. If you have this
type of telephone, use the Automatic dial or Pre-dial feature
for on-hook dialing.
Using Automatic dial
Automatic dial allows you to dial a number without selecting
a line. Your prime line is selected as soon as you start dialing
a number.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Making calls / 83
Automatic dial does not work if your telephone has no prime
line or if your prime line is in use.
Telephones connected to an analog terminal adapter (ATA)
cannot use Automatic dial.
Using Pre-dial
Pre-dial allows you to enter a telephone number, check it, then
change it before actually making the call. The call is not dialed
until you select a line or line pool, or pick up the receiver. You
can pre-dial both external and internal numbers. You must,
however, select the correct type of line (external or internal)
for the type of number you entered.
Tip - If your telephone starts ringing while you are
pre-dialing a number, you can stop the ringing by turning on
Do Not Disturb (
). This does not affect numbers
you are entering.
²¡Þ
You cannot pre-dial a telephone number if all the lines on your
telephone are busy.
When the internal number you called is
busy
There are a couple of methods you can use if the telephone you
are calling is currently busy.
Priority Call
If you get a busy signal or a Do Not Disturb message when you
call someone in the office, you can interrupt them. Use this
feature for urgent calls only.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
84 / Making calls
Tip - Priority calls cannot be made to Hunt Group DNs. For
more information about Hunt Groups, see Programming Hunt
Groups on page 169.
Making a priority call
1. Press
²ßá
.
2. Wait for a connection, then speak.
A person who receives a priority call while on another call has
eight seconds to accept or block the call. For information about
blocking calls, see Stopping calls from ringing at your
telephone: Do Not Disturb (DND) on page 200. If the person
does nothing, the priority call feature puts their active call,
including conference parties, on Exclusive Hold and connects
your call.
Giving a telephone the ability to make priority
calls
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press ‘ nine times. The display shows Priority
call:.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Making calls / 85
6. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No)
Displays
Call blocked
You tried to place a priority call to another
Norstar telephone. The person you called
has blocked your call. Try to call later.
Please wait
The party you are calling has eight seconds
to decide whether to accept or reject your
priority call.
Priority denied
The telephone you are calling has already
received a priority call or is unable to receive
priority calls.
You can make a priority call only while your telephone
displays:
221 busy
PRIORITY
LATER
Calling 221
PRIORITY
LATER
The set you are trying to call has call on all
assigned lines.
Do not disturb
PRIORITY
LATER
The set you are trying to call has the Do Not
Disturb feature activated.
On another call
PRIORITY
LATER
The set you are trying to call is busy because
the person is on another line.
Using Ring Again
Use Ring Again when you call someone on your Norstar
system and their telephone is busy or there is no answer. Ring
Again can tell you when they hang up or next use their
telephone. You can use Ring Again to tell you when a busy
line pool becomes available.
Tip - The Ring Again feature cannot be used when calling a
Hunt Group DN. For more information about Hunt Groups,
see Programming Hunt Groups on page 169
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
86 / Making calls
Turning on Ring Again
1. Press
²Û
before you hang up.
Using Ring Again cancels any previous Ring Again requests
at your telephone.
Canceling Ring Again
1. Press
²£Û
to cancel a Ring Again request.
Displays
Can't ring again
You cannot use Ring Again on your current
call. You can only use Ring Again while you
have a busy signal on an internal call or line
pool request, or while an internal call is
ringing.
Ring Again?
YES
NO
Press YES to use Ring Again. Press NO if
you prefer to send a message.
EXIT
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Time savers for making calls
Storing a number on a memory button for
Autodial
You can program memory buttons for one-touch dialing of
internal or external telephone numbers.
Buttons used for lines, answer DNs, or handsfree/mute cannot
be used as autodial buttons.
If the power to your Norstar system is off for more than three
days, autodial numbers, and some other system programming,
may be lost from the memory.
Adding an autodial button
²¥Ú
²¥Û
Use these features to program external and internal numbers.
1. Press
Press
to program an external number.
to program an internal number.
2. Choose a button and then enter the number as if you were
dialing it.
When programming Autodial you can use:
•
Last Number Redial
•
Saved Number Redial
•
destination codes — use the Intercom line as the line
•
host system signaling
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
88 / Time savers for making calls
Choosing a line for Autodial
To include a line selection for an external number, press the
line or intercom button before you enter the number. To select
a line pool, press a programmed line pool button, or press the
button labeled Intercom and enter a line pool access code.
If you select a line before pressing the autodial button, the call
goes out on the line you have selected instead of the line that
is part of the autodialer programming.
For the M7100 and T7100 telephones, an external autodialer
can be programmed only by using a line and not a line pool.
Tip - If you do not include a line selection in an autodial
number, the call uses your prime line (if you have one ).
Using intercom as the line for Autodial
If you press the Intercom button as the line for an external
autodial number, you must include a valid line pool access
code or a destination code. If line pool access codes or
destination codes are changed, remember to reprogram
autodial numbers.
Displays
987___
QUIT
BKSP
Ã
erase an incorrect digit. Press
when you are finished.
Autodial full
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
³
Continue to enter digits until the number is
or BKSP to
OK complete. Press
or OK
The memory allotted to autodial numbers in
your Norstar system is full.
P0603535 02
Time savers for making calls / 89
³
While programming external Autodial, you
erased the button by pressing
or OK
before entering any digits.
Button erased
Enter digits
QUIT
OK
Enter the number you want to program.
Choose the line first, if necessary, then enter
the number exactly as if you were making a
call.
Intercom #: ___
QUIT
Enter the internal telephone number you
want to program.
Invalid number
You are programming an internal autodial
button and have entered a number that is not
an internal number on your system.
Enter a valid internal number.
If the number you are entering is a
destination code, use external autodial.
Press a button
QUIT
Press the memory button you want to
program.
Program and HOLD
Enter the number you want to program onto
the button, then press
.
Program and OK
QUIT
Programmed
OK
³
³
Enter the number you want to program onto
the button, then press
or OK. You may
include a line or line pool selection in an
autodial sequence by selecting the line
before entering any digits.
The number is stored on the button.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
90 / Time savers for making calls
Using Last Number Redial
Press
²Þ
to redial the last external number you dialed.
Last Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits.
²¥â£
Tip - If you have a programmed Last Number Redial button,
), then press the
you can use Button Inquiry (
) to check the last
Last Number Redial button followed by
number before you dial it.
Preventing a telephone from using Last
Number Redial
Last Number Redial can be restricted at individual telephones.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See A map for using programming on page 23 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠.
5. Press ‘ three times. The display shows
Restrictions.
6. Press ≠ twice.
7. Press ‘. The display shows Allow last no:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Time savers for making calls / 91
Displays
Hidden number
No last number
The last number you dialed was a speed dial
number that displayed a name rather than
the number. The number is dialed correctly,
but you cannot see it.
You have not dialed an external telephone
number since the last power interruption or
system reset.
Tip - You can copy a number onto an autodial button using
Last Number Redial.
Using Speed Dial
Norstar provides two types of speed dialing: system and
personal.
•
System Speed Dial programming allows you to assign a
maximum of 255 three-digit speed dial codes (001-255) to
the external numbers your co-workers call most
frequently.
•
User Speed Dial programming allows individuals to
program a maximum of 24 speed dial numbers that are
personal to their telephone. These numbers also have
three-digit codes (256-279)
Speed dial numbers are subject to the same restriction filters as
regularly dialed numbers. Your installer or customer service
representative can program system speed dial numbers to
bypass dialing restrictions.
Speed dial numbers may include host system signaling codes.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
92 / Time savers for making calls
Making a speed dial call
Tip - There is no difference between using User Speed Dial
and using System Speed Dial. They differ only in how you
program them.
²â
1. Press
to quickly dial external telephone numbers
that have been programmed onto speed dial codes.
2. Enter the appropriate three-digit speed dial code.
Changing and adding System Speed Dials
The system coordinator assigns numbers to System Speed Dial
codes for the entire system. See Adding or changing a system speed
dial on page 31.
Adding or changing User Speed Dial
To add or change a User Speed Dial number on your
telephone:
1. Press
²¥Ý
.
2. Enter a three-digit code from 256 to 279 that you want to
associate with a telephone number.
3. To include a line selection for this number, press the line
or intercom button. To select a line pool, press a
programmed line pool button, or press the Intercom button
and enter a line pool access code.
For the M7100 and T7100 sets, you can select only a line
pool.
³
4. Enter the number you want to program.
5. Press
or OK.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Time savers for making calls / 93
Displays
01:9___
CANCL
³Ã
Continue entering the number you want to
BKSP
Enter digits
QUIT
OK program. You can change the number by
pressing BKSP or
. When you are
finished, press
or OK.
³
Enter the telephone number you want to
OK program exactly as if you were dialing it
normally. When you are finished, press
or OK.
Invalid code
You have entered a code outside the code
range (001-255 for system, 256-279 for user
codes).
No number stored
There is no number stored on the speed dial
code you have dialed.
Program and HOLD
If you want to program a line or line pool
selection for this speed dial number, select
the line or line pool. Otherwise, enter the
telephone number exactly as if you were
dialing it normally. When you are finished,
press
.
Program and OK
QUIT
³
If you want to program a line or line pool
OK selection for this speed dial number, select
the line or line pool. Otherwise, enter the
telephone number you want to program
exactly as if you were dialing it normally.
When you are finished, press OK.
Select a line
There is no line associated with the speed
dial number you are trying to use. Select a
free external line or line pool and enter the
speed dial feature code again.
Unknown number
The system cannot dial the number stored.
Reprogram the number.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
94 / Time savers for making calls
Using Saved Number Redial
²ßà
You can use this feature while you are on an external call that
you dialed to save the number so that you can call it again later.
Each telephone can save one number at a time with Saved
Number Redial, not one number for each line.
Tip - You can copy a number onto an autodial button using
Saved Number Redial.
Saved Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits.
Dialing a saved number
Press
²ßà
when you are not on a call.
²¥â
If you have a programmed Saved Number Redial button, you
can use Button Inquiry (
) to check the last number
before you dial it.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Time savers for making calls / 95
Blocking Saved Number Redial
Saved Number Redial can be restricted at individual
telephones.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See A map for using programming on page 23 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠.
5. Press ‘ three times. The display shows
Restrictions.
6. Press ≠ twice.
7. Press ‘ twice. The display shows Allow saved
no:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
Displays
Hidden number
No number saved
P0603535 02
You have saved a speed dial number that
displays a name rather than the number. The
number is dialed correctly, but you cannot
see it.
You have tried to save the number of an
incoming call. You can only save numbers
that you have dialed yourself.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
96 / Time savers for making calls
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Handling many calls at once
Using Hold
You can temporarily suspend a call by pressing
³
.
When a call is on hold, its indicator flashes on all telephones
that have access to the line. The call can be retrieved from any
of these telephones.
³
On the M7100 and T7100 sets,
alternates between two
lines. One line is active, the other is on hold. These sets cannot
retrieve a call placed on hold by another telephone.
Tip - Answered Hunt Group calls can be placed on hold at the
answering telephone. For more information about Hunt
Groups, see Programming Hunt Groups on page 169.
Retrieving a held call
You can connect to a call on hold by pressing the flashing line
button of the held call.
Holding automatically
If your line has been programmed with full autohold, you can
switch from one call to another and have your calls put on hold
automatically.
Press the line button of the caller to whom you want to speak.
Your current caller is put on hold automatically.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
98 / Handling many calls at once
Listening on hold
³
If you have been put on hold, you can hang up the receiver
while you wait for the other person to return.
1. Press
.
2. Hang up the receiver.
3. Press the line button of the call. You may hear indications
from the far end that you are on hold, for example, tones or
music.
4. When the person you were talking to returns, you hear
them through your telephone speaker. Lift the receiver and
talk.
Tip - If Automatic handsfree has been assigned to your
telephone, you can use the handsfree/mute feature instead of
Listen on Hold.
Holding a call exclusively
You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that it can be retrieved
only at your telephone.
²àá ²³
Press
or
. The line appears busy on all
other telephones, and the call cannot be picked up by anyone
else in the office.
Displays
On hold: LINENAM
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
You have placed one or more calls on hold.
The name of the line that has been held the
longest is displayed.
P0603535 02
Handling many calls at once / 99
Using Call Queuing
²¡âÚ
If you have more than one call ringing at your telephone, use
this feature code to choose the call that has the highest priority.
Call Queuing answers incoming external calls before callback,
camped, and transferred calls.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
100 / Handling many calls at once
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Transferring calls
Using the transfer feature
Transfer allows you to direct a call to a telephone in your
Norstar system, within the network, or external to the network.
²àâ
Transferring a call
1. Press
.
2. Call the person to whom you want to transfer the call.
3. If you want to talk to the person to whom you are
transferring the call, wait for them to answer, then speak to
them before proceeding.
4. When you are ready to complete the transfer, press
JOIN.
¨
or
You cannot use Last Number Redial, Saved Number Redial, a
speed dial code, Priority Call or Ring Again to dial the number
for a transfer.
Depending on how a private network call is routed, it may not
always be possible for the system to return a transferred call to
you if the transferred call is not answered. When transferring
a call to a private network destination, stay on the line until the
person to whom you are transferring the call answers.
You cannot use the Line Pool feature code to access a line pool
for a transfer. To use a line pool, use a programmed line pool
button, or press the key labelled Intercom and enter a line pool
access code or a destination code.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
102 / Transferring calls
If you have an auxiliary ringer programmed to ring for calls on
an external line, and you transfer a call on that line without
announcing the transfer, the auxiliary ringer rings for the
transferred call.
Transferring external calls
If an external call is transferred to a busy telephone, or not
answered after a few rings, the call automatically rings again
at the telephone from which it was transferred, and the display
indicates that the telephone was busy or that no one answered.
When transferring an external call to an external number, the
external call you are trying to transfer must be an incoming
call on a disconnect supervised line.
While on a conference call, you can remove yourself from the
conference and connect the other two callers using the
Transfer feature. However, if both of the other people are from
outside the system, at least one of the outside callers must have
called you and both of the outside calls must be on disconnect
supervision lines.
Note: Transfer via Hold on DID lines is not supported. Once
a call is answered, the line appearances on all other sets
are free immediately to take other calls. This allows a
greater number of calls to be received. Use the Call Park
feature to transfer a call.
In certain situations, you may experience lower volume levels
when transferring an external call to an external person, or
when transferring two external callers from a conference call.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Transferring calls / 103
Canceling a transfer
You can reconnect to the person you are trying to transfer at
any time before the transfer is complete.
1. Press
²£àâ
or CANCL.
¨
2. If you are not reconnected to your original call, press
and then press the line key of the original call, which is
now on hold.
Displays
You are talking to the person you want to
221>222
CANCL RETRY JOIN transfer the call to. Press RETRY if you decide
¨
to transfer the call to someone else. Press
or JOIN to transfer the call.
The person to whom you tried to transfer a
221 no reply
CALLBACK call did not answer. Press CALLBACK or the
flashing line button to reconnect to the call.
On the 7100 telephones, lift the receiver.
The person to whom you tried to transfer a
Do not disturb
CANCL RETRY JOIN call has Do Not Disturb active on their
telephone. Press JOIN to transfer the call
anyway. Press RETRY to transfer the call to
someone else. Press CANCL or the flashing
²£àâ
line button to reconnect to the call (on M7100
or T7100 telephones, press
).
Invalid number
CANCL RETRY
You entered an invalid internal number.
Press RETRY and enter the number again.
Line001 hung up
The external caller you were transferring
hung up before the transfer was complete.
Line001>221
Press JOIN to transfer the call on line 001 to
CANCL RETRY JOIN telephone 221. Press RETRY if, after talking
to the person at extension 221, you decide to
transfer the call to someone else.
Not in service
CANCL RETRY
The telephone to which you are trying to
transfer a call is out of service.
Restricted call
CANCL RETRY
You cannot transfer the call because of
telephone or line restrictions.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
104 / Transferring calls
Still in trnsfer
CANCL RETRY
Complete the transfer in progress before you
access a new feature, answer another
alerting call, or select an outgoing line.
Transfer denied
CANCL RETRY
Your transfer cannot be completed for one of
these reasons:
• All the resources needed to perform a
transfer are in use. Try again later.
• You have tried to transfer an external
call to another external party. Some
restrictions apply.
• You cannot transfer a conference call.
Transfer to:2___
CANCL RETRY
Press RETRY if you entered the wrong
internal number or if the person to whom you
are transferring the call is unavailable.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
Using Camp-on
You can transfer an external call to another telephone within
the system, even if all of its lines are busy.
1. Press
²¡Û
.
2. Dial the number of the telephone you want to camp the call
to.
Camped calls appear on a line button on the receiving
telephone, if one is available. If there is no line button
available, you receive a message on the display and hear Camp
tones.
Each set can handle only one camped call at a time.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Transferring calls / 105
Displays
You tried to camp a call to a telephone that
221 Camp max
CALLBACK already has a camped call. The call has
come back to you. Press the CALLBACK
button or the line button to reconnect to the
call.
On M7100 or T7100 telephones, just pick up
the receiver.
The person to whom you redirected a call
221 DND
CALLBACK has Do Not Disturb active on the telephone.
The call has come back to you. Press the
CALLBACK button or the line button to
reconnect to the call. On M7100 and T7100
telephones, just pick up the receiver.
Camp denied
You have tried to camp an internal call. You
can only camp external calls.
Camp to:
CANCL
Dial the number of the internal telephone to
which the call is sent.
Camped: 221
The telephone to which you camped a call
CALLBACK did not answer the call. The call has come
back to you. Press CALLBACK or the line
button to reconnect to the call. On M7100 or
T7100 telephones, just pick up the receiver.
Line001 hung up
A call you camped has come back to you, but
the caller hung up before you could
reconnect.
The telephone to which you have camped a
Not in service
CALLBACK call is out of service or is being used for
programming. The call has come back to
you. Press CALLBACK or the line button to
reconnect to the call. On M7100 or T7100
telephones, just pick up the receiver.
Release a call
The line that the camped call is on is in use
or that line does not appear at your
telephone. Release the line or release an
internal line.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
106 / Transferring calls
Parking a call
²àÝ ²ßâ
You can suspend a call so that it can be retrieved from any
telephone in your system.
1. Press
.
2. Use the Page feature (
) or press PAGE to
announce the retrieval code displayed by your telephone.
Retrieving a parked call
1. Select an internal line.
On M7100 or T7100 telephones, pick up the receiver.
2. Dial the Call Park retrieval code.
Using Call Park
When you park a call, the system assigns one of 25 codes for
the retrieval of the call. These codes consist of the Call Park
prefix, which may be any digit from 1 to 9, and a two-digit call
number between 01 and 25. For example, if the Call Park
prefix is 1, the first parked call is assigned Call Park retrieval
code 101. The call park prefix is assigned during system
programming. Check your Modular ICS Programming Record
if you are unsure about what range your system uses.
The Norstar system assigns Call Park codes in sequence, from
the lowest to the highest, until all the codes are used. This
round-robin approach means that a greater variety of codes are
used, which makes it easier for a call to reach the right person
when more than one incoming call is parked.
The highest call number, which is made up of the Call Park
prefix followed by 25, is used only by T7100/M7100
telephones, analog telephones, or devices connected to the
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Transferring calls / 107
system using an analog terminal adapter (ATA) or an Analog
Station Module (ASM). Analog telephones or devices cannot
use the other Call Park codes.
Your installer or customer service representative programs
both the Call Park prefix and the delay before parked calls are
returned to the originating telephone. External calls parked for
longer than the programmed delay are returned to your
telephone.
Tip - Answered Hunt Group calls are parked in the same
manner as other calls. For more information about Hunt
Groups, see Programming Hunt Groups on page 169.
Call Park can be disabled by your installer or customer service
representative.
Displays
Already parked
The person you were talking to has already
parked your call. You cannot park the same
call.
No call to park
You have attempted to use Call Park with no
active call on your telephone. If the call you
want to park is on hold, reconnect to it before
you park it.
Invalid number
You have entered an invalid retrieval code.
No call on: 101
There was no call on the retrieval code you
entered.
Park denied
You have tried to park a conference call. Split
the conference and park the calls separately.
The person who retrieves the calls can
reconnect the conference.
Parked on: 402
PAGE
EXIT
Record the code shown. Use Page
(
) or press PAGE to announce the
call and its retrieval code.
P0603535 02
²ßâ
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
108 / Transferring calls
All available retrieval codes are in use.
Transfer the call or take a message instead.
Parking full
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
Using system-wide call appearance
(SWCA)
This feature allows a call to maintain an appearance on the
System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) buttons to a group of
users for the life of the call. SWCA codes can be assigned to
up to 16 program buttons with indicators on each telephone in
a group.
See Programming a feature code onto a memory button on page 147
for general information about setting or changing key
programming for a telephone. SWCA keys can be assigned to
memory keys using
to assign the SWCA feature
codes:
to
.
²¥Ü
²¥ÞÛâ
²¥ÞÜÞ
Refer to the Module ICS 6.1 Installer Guide for information
about programming buttons through the programming
interface.
TIPs - Telephones without assigned SWCA keys can
still retrieve a SWCA call by entering the feature code
that was used to park the call, providing that they have
a free intercom key with which to accept the call.
However, there is no indication on these telephones to
show which codes were used to park which call. This
information can be communicated by the person who
parked the call by using a voice call or by using the
Page feature to provide a verbal alert.
A call can also be parked on the system by entering a
SWCA code, if there are no assigned SWCA user keys on
the telephone.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Transferring calls / 109
Tips - Since SWCA keys use the park feature, check with
your system administrator to ensure that park is turned on for
your system.
A SWCA call on park that exceeds the park timeout timer is
released from the SWCA button and rings again at the
original telephone.
Each group telephone must either have a line appearance of the
call coming in, or a free intercom button to be able to retrieve
a SWCA call. The number of SWCA keys that can be assigned
will depend on available buttons on the telephone. T7316,
T7316E, T7316E+KIM, and T7324 telephones provide the
broadest use of this feature since they have the most memory
keys with indicators. Companion, M7000/T7000 and
M7100N/T7100 telephones do not have line or intercom
buttons, therefore, they cannot be assigned SWCA lines.
Incoming calls
When you answer an external call, the system can react in one
of two ways, depending on what settings were specified in
system programming:
•
³
the call may be transferred automatically to a free SWCA
key when you answer the call. To park the call, and free
. The call
your line, press the SWCA key or press
becomes available to any other telephone that has that
SWCA key.
OR
•
P0603535 02
you may need to press a free SWCA button to transfer the
call manually to a SWCA key. In this case, when you
transfer the call, the call parks on the line, and the line the
call came in on is released.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
110 / Transferring calls
When you put a call on hold, the system can react in one of two
ways if you have SWCA keys defined:
•
when you put the call on Hold, the call transfers to a free
SWCA key and all the other extensions with
corresponding SWCA keys display a flashing indicator
beside the button. The call can be picked up at any other
extension. If the call automatically transferred to a SWCA
key when it was answered, then this option puts the call on
hold at the same key.
OR
•
when you put the call on Hold, it stays on hold on the line
that it came in on. To make the call available to other
extensions, press a free SWCA key to transfer the line.
Calls with appearances on SWCA keys show a solid indicator
when the call is active. On the extension where the call is
active, an Intercom or Line button also becomes active.
SWCA indicators, call status states (auto assign)
Call is answered
and automatically
assigns to a SWCA
key.
Call is put on Hold.
The SWCA
indicator flashes at
all extensions. The
indicator beside the
line key disappears,
freeing up the line
Call is retrieved.
An indicator appears beside
the Intercom button. The
SWCA indicator becomes
solid on all extensions,
indicating that the call is
active.
SWCA1
SWCA1
SWCA1
SWCA4
SWCA2
SWCA2
SWCA2
SWCA5
SWCA3
SWCA3
SWCA3
SWCA6
Line 1
Line 1
Line 1
Line 2
Line 2
Line 2
Intercom
Intercom
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Transferring calls / 111
Outgoing calls
When you make an outgoing call using the intercom key on
your telephone, the call is automatically transferred to the first
available SWCA key. Solid indicators appear beside the
intercom button and the SWCA key on your telephone. All
other telephones in the group also see a solid indicator beside
the SWCA key, indicating that the line for that key is in use. If
you put the call on hold (or press the SWCA key), the SWCA
key indicator fast-flashes on your telephone, and slow-flashes
on the other telephones in the group. The call can then be
picked up by any other telephone in the group.
No free call keys
If all the SWCA keys are currently occupied when a new call
comes in, you can still put the call on Hold.
•
If a SWCA key has been freed up between the time you
answered the call, and when you want to put the call on
Hold, the call will transfer to the free SWCA key, or you
can manually transfer it to a free SWCA key. The call will
act as described in Incoming calls on page 109.
•
If all SWCA keys are still occupied when you put the new
call on Hold, the call will be held at your telephone on the
line it came in on. When a SWCA key becomes free, you
can take the call off hold and press the free SWCA key so
the call has a group-wide appearance.
These principles also apply to outgoing calls.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
112 / Transferring calls
Using Callback
When you direct a call you have answered to another
telephone, the system monitors the call to make sure it is
answered. If no one answers the call within a set length of
time, the system directs it back to you.
Callback generates a variety of displays. Most occur after a set
delay and are listed in the index. Some occur immediately if
the telephone to which you are directing a call is out of service
or otherwise unavailable. These are listed with the descriptions
of the specific features such as Transfer or Camp-on.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Forwarding your calls
Forwarding your calls to another Norstar
telephone
Use this feature to forward your calls within your system or
network.
1. Press
²Ý
.
2. Enter the number of the internal telephone to which you
want your calls forwarded.
Use Line Redirection to forward calls outside the system. Line
redirection takes precedence over Call Forward.
TIP - T7316E telephones display this call forwarding
icon when a call has been forwarded:
Canceling Call Forward
1. Press
P0603535 02
²£Ý
.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
114 / Forwarding your calls
Using Call Forward at your telephone
²Ý
When you use
, all calls go to the destination you
select, regardless of how Forward on busy and Forward no
answer are programmed.
Tip - If your telephone is a member of a Hunt Group, the Call
Forward all calls setting is overridden by the Hunt Group
routing for Hunt Group calls. For more information about Hunt
Groups, see Programming Hunt Groups on page 169.
If the telephone to which you forwarded your calls does not
have the same ext ernal lines as your telephone, the forwarded
calls appear on intercom buttons.
If a call is forwarded, it does not ring but the line indicator
flashes on your telephone. You can answer the call by pressing
the button next to the flashing indicator.
Tip - Beware of creating call-forward loops
If you are one of a group of people who regularly forward their
calls to one another, be aware that it is possible to set up
forward loops where a call is forwarded from one telephone to
another in a circle, and is never answered anywhere.
Overriding Call Forward
If you call someone who has their calls forwarded to you, your
call rings at that telephone even though they are forwarding
their calls to you.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Forwarding your calls / 115
Changing the automatic Call Forward settings for a
telephone
Call forwarding occurs automatically when a call is not
answered or the line is busy. These automatic options are
changed in programming.
For step-by-step instructions, see Change where a call goes
when there is no answer on page 37.
Changing Forward no answer
Forward no answer redirects unanswered calls to another
telephone on your Norstar system.
Tip - If the set is a member of a Hunt Group, the Call Forward
no answer feature is overridden and the Hunt Group call
continues to ring until the hunt time has expired. For more
information about Hunt Groups, see Programming Hunt
Groups on page 169.
Line Redirection takes precedence over Forward no answer.
For instructions for changing Forward no answer refer to
Change where a call goes when there is no answer on page 37.
Changing the delay before a call is forwarded
You can assign the number of times that the incoming call
rings at your telephone before the call is forwarded. To
estimate the delay time in seconds, multiply the number of
rings by six.
For step-by-step instructions, see Change the number of times
the telephone rings before it is forwarded on page 38.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
116 / Forwarding your calls
Forward on busy
Forward on busy redirects your calls to another telephone on
your Norstar system when you are busy on a call, or when you
have Do Not Disturb activated at your telephone. For step-bystep instructions, see Making changes to Call Forward No
Answer on page 37.
Line Redirection takes precedence over Forward on busy.
Calls that are redirected by Line Redirection are not affected
by any Call Forward features or Call Forward programming.
Telephones that have Forward on busy active can receive
priority calls. If you are busy on a target line call, another call
to that target line is redirected to the prime telephone for that
target line.
Tip - If the set is a member of a Hunt Group, the Call Forward
on busy feature is overridden and the Hunt Group call continues
to ring until the hunt time has expired. For more information
about Hunt Groups, see Programming Hunt Groups on page
169.
DND on Busy
When you are busy on a call and a second call comes in, your
telephone rings softly to alert you to the second call. If you
find this second ring distracting, you can have the system
prevent a second call from disturbing you by assigning Do Not
Disturb (DND) on Busy to your extension.
When DND on Busy is turned on for the telephone, internal
and private network callers hear a busy tone instead of ringing
when you are on the telephone. External callers are transferred
to the prime set used in your system. For step-by-step
instructions, see Making Changes to Do Not Disturb on Busy
on page 40.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Forwarding your calls / 117
If you use DND on Busy, the line indicator for an external
incoming call flashes, but your telephone does not ring.
Forward on busy takes priority over DND on Busy.
If an external call uses a target line, the call is processed
according to the programming of the target line. If the target
line is busy, the caller may hear a busy tone or the call may be
routed to the prime set for the target line regardless of the DND
on Busy programming for the telephone.
Tip - If a telephone is a member of a Hunt Group and the
telephone activates this feature, the telephone does not receive
notification of incoming Hunt Group calls while on a call. The
DND on busy feature overrides the Hunt Group. For more
information about Hunt Groups see Programming Hunt Groups
on page 169.
Call Forward and Voice Mail
If you want a voice mail system to pick up unanswered calls
automatically, do either of the following:
•
use the internal number of your voice mail as the
destination when you program Forward no Answer and
Forward on busy
Note: If the voice mail hardware is attached to another
system on the private network, the forwarded number for
the voice mail system will be an external number on all
systems in the network, except the one to which the voice
mail system is directly connected.
•
make the ring delay greater than the delay used by your
voice mail system, if your voice messaging system or
service automatically retrieves calls
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
118 / Forwarding your calls
Displays
There are several reasons why you may get
this message. For instance, you cannot
forward your calls to a telephone that has
been forwarded to your telephone.
Forward denied
Forward>221
Your calls are being forwarded to telephone
CANCL 221.
Two or more telephones are linked in a
forwarding chain, and one of them is out of
service or is being used for programming.
Not in service
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
Line Redirection
Line Redirection allows you to send your external calls to a
telephone outside the office. You may choose to redirect all
your external lines or only some of them.
Line Redirection takes precedence over the Call Forward
feature. If both features are active on a telephone, incoming
external calls on redirected lines are routed to the specified
Selective Line Redirection (SLR) external destination.
Incoming internal calls are forwarded to the specified Call
Forward destination.
You cannot use the Line Redirection feature on an M7100 or
a T7100 telephone, or on a telephone connected to an ATA.
Turning on Line Redirection
Follow these steps to turn on Line Redirection:
1. Press
²¡Ý
.
2. Select the outgoing line to be used for redirected calls.
3. Enter the number to which calls are redirected.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Forwarding your calls / 119
Refer to the list below for suggestions.
4. Select the lines to be redirected.
In step 3, you can enter the telephone number to which you
want to redirect calls, using one of the following methods:
³
•
Press an external autodial button.
•
Enter an external telephone number (using no more than
24 digits) then press
or OK.
•
Press
or OK if the line you have chosen as the
outgoing line is a private network line that does not require
you to dial digits.
³
³
³
If you use ALL to redirect all your lines, it is important that you
wait until all the lines on your telephone light up before
or OK before all the lines
pressing
or OK. If you press
light up, those lines not lit are not redirected.
Tip - The line chosen for redirecting calls on other lines can be
used normally when it is not busy on a redirected call. To avoid
redirection failing because the chosen line is in use, choose a
line pool with several lines in it.
Tip - The system does not check that the number you give for
line redirection is a valid one. If you redirect to an invalid
number, redirection fails. Using an autodial button to enter the
redirection number helps avoid this possibility. An autodial
button used for line redirection must be programmed to use a
specific line.
Canceling Line Redirection
When you are ready to resume service, use this procedure to
cancel line redirection.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
²£¡Ý
120 / Forwarding your calls
1. Press
.
2. Select the lines you no longer want to be redirected.
Allowing a telephone to redirect calls
You can use programming to determine if a set can use the
redirect calls feature and turn it on or off.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
.
2. Press
password).
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press “ four times. The display reads
Allow redirect:.
6. Press CHANGE to select Y (Yes) or N (No).
Turning the redirect ring for a telephone on or off
You can program a telephone to ring briefly (200
milliseconds) when a call is redirected to one of the lines
assigned to it.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
.
(the default System Coordinator
P0603535 02
Forwarding your calls / 121
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press “ three times. The display reads
Redirect ring:.
6. Press CHANGE to select Y (Yes) or N (No).
Tip - If a telephone has redirect ring enabled, it rings briefly
for redirected calls on one of its lines even if another telephone
set up the line redirection.
Displays while redirecting lines
Intercom
You selected the intercom button as the
facility to place the call on. Enter a line pool
code or a destination code.
£ ¥
Press
or ADD to begin redirection. Press
Line Redirection
QUIT ADD REMOVE
or REMOVE to cancel a previous
redirection.
No line to use
You have one external line on your
telephone, but you need a second line to
perform line redirection. Redirect your
external line using a line pool as the outgoing
line.
Outgoing line
You are attempting to redirect a line and the
line you have chosen is the outgoing line you
have selected as a destination. You cannot
redirect a line to itself. Select another line.
Pool code: ___
QUIT
Enter a valid line pool access code.
Redir by 221
OVERRIDE
You have attempted to redirect a line, but
someone else has already redirected that
line. Press
or OVERRIDE to override the
previous redirection and redirect the line as
you want.
P0603535 02
¥
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
122 / Forwarding your calls
Redirect denied
You can redirect calls only on individual
lines.
Select line out
QUIT
Select the line that is used to redirect calls
out of the system.
Select line(s)
QUIT
ALL
Press the lines to be redirected. To undo a
line selection, press it again. Press ALL to
redirect all your lines.
Select line(s)
ALL
OK
³
Continue to press the lines to be redirected.
Press
or OK when you are finished.
The line you are attempting to redirect
cannot be redirected because the hardware
does not support redirection.
Unequipped line
Displays while canceling redirection
Press the lines that are no longer to be
redirected. The lines light up as you press
them. Once you cancel redirection for a line
you cannot restore it by pressing the line
again. Press ALL to cancel redirection for all
Select line(s)
QUIT
ALL
³
³
your lines. To end, press
Select line(s)
ALL
OK
or OK.
Continue to press the lines that are no longer
to be redirected. Press
or OK when you
are finished.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
How Line Redirection is different from Call Forward
Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular
telephone to another telephone within the Norstar system. Line
Redirection redirects only the lines you specify, no matter
which telephones they appear on, to a telephone outside the
Norstar system. Line Redirection takes precedence over Call
Forward.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Forwarding your calls / 123
Using Line Redirection
You redirect lines at a telephone, but once redirected, the lines
are redirected for the entire system.
You can redirect only lines that appear at line buttons on your
telephone.
You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are in the
middle of programming Line Redirection, but none of the
Norstar call handling features are available until the feature
times out. If you need to use a Norstar feature to process the
call, quit Line Redirection programming by pressing
. Do
not press
or you disconnect the call you are trying to
process.
¨
²
While you are programming Line Redirection you do not
receive any indication of calls that do not actually ring at your
telephone.
Be careful to avoid redirection loops. If for example, you
redirect your lines to your branch office and your branch office
redirects its lines to you, you can create a redirection loop. If
these calls are long distance, you end up paying charges.
In certain situations, callers may experience lower volume
levels when you redirect calls to an external location.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
124 / Forwarding your calls
Centralized voice mail and auto attendant
How centralized voice mail and auto attendant systems are
accessed, depends on which node users are attached.
Using a centralized voice mail system
If your system is part of a network that uses just one Meridian
voice mail or Norstar voice mail system, how the users access
the system will depend on which node they reside.
²
Users with telephones attached to the same system as the voice
mail system use the internal prompts (
981) to access
messages.
Users with telephones attached to any other nodes, will be
prompted to enter a mailbox number, then a password and the
# key at the end of the sequence. The subsequent voice
prompts will be the same ones that the users encounter when
they dial into a system from a remote site. As well, instead of
using the
key to access feature codes, users use the
key ( 981), just as they would if they were dialing into their
own system from a remote location.
²
¥
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
¥
P0603535 02
Communicating in the office
Paging
Paging allows you to make announcements over the Norstar
system using the telephone speakers, or an external
loudspeaker system, if one is available.
Making a page announcement
1. Press
Ú
Û
Ü
²ßâ
.
2. Choose a page type. Page types are:
through the telephone speakers (internal page)
through an external speaker (external page)
both internal and external (combined page)
3. If necessary, choose a zone.
¨
4. Make your announcement.
5. Press
.
Tip - Instead of entering the Page feature code followed by the
page type, you can enter the following shortcut codes.
²ßÚ
²ßÛ
²ßÜ
Page zone 0 is all zones.
Internal
External
Combined
P0603535 02
and zone (0 to 6)
(code 2 has no zones)
and zone (0 to 6)
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
126 / Communicating in the office
Activating and deactivating the ability to page
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press ‘ seven times. The display reads Paging.
6. Press CHANGE to select the setting: Y (Yes) or N (No).
Creating page zones
Each telephone can be assigned to one of six zones for
receiving pages.
Tip - Hunt Group DNs cannot be included in a page zone. For
more information about Hunt Groups, see Programming Hunt
Groups on page 169.
You need the programming template. See Getting started with
Norstar on page 13 for more information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Communicating in the office / 127
4. Press ≠ twice.
5. Press ‘ six times. The display reads Page Zone.
6. Press CHANGE to select the setting: 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6 or None.
You can make a telephone part of a page zone only if the
telephone has paging set to Y (Yes).
A zone is any set of Norstar telephones that you want to group
together for paging, regardless of their location. The
maximum number of sets in a page zone is 50.
Your installer programs whether a tone sounds before a page
begins, and the maximum number of seconds a page can last
before it is automatically turned off.
Tip - Make sure that everyone who needs to make page
announcement has a list showing which telephones are in which
page zones. Enter this information into your Modular ICS 6.1
Programming Record.
Displays
Enter zone:___
Enter the desired page zone number (0- 6) or
ALL press ALL.
You have entered a page zone code that is
not between 0 and 6.
Invalid zone
Page choice:
SETS SPKR
BOTH
Select the type of page you want. See the list
in Making a page announcement on page
125.
Page timeout
The time allotted for paging has expired.
Paging ALL
You are making a page. The display shows
the page zone you have chosen. Press
or
when you are finished.
Paging busy
A page is already being made in the page
zone you have requested.
P0603535 02
¨
²
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
128 / Communicating in the office
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
Tip - You can make an announcement to one person by
placing a voice call to their telephone.
Using Page with external paging equipment
When you make a page that uses external paging equipment —
external page or combined page — the Long Tones feature is
automatically activated for the external paging system only.
This allows you to control optional equipment with the Long
Tones feature.
Sending messages
The Messages feature allows you to leave a message on the
display of another digital set or to analog telephones connected
to an Analog Station Module (ASM). The Messages feature
indicates if you have any messages waiting.
The Messages feature uses a message waiting list to keep a
record of your internal messages and your external voice mail
messages if you subscribe to a voice message service with
visual message waiting indication.
Sending a message
You can leave a message on the display of another telephone
in your Norstar system.
You can send up to four messages to different telephones,
including your voice message center. If your telephone is a
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Communicating in the office / 129
direct-dial telephone or a central answering position (CAP),
you can send up to 30 messages.
²Ú
Only the designated direct-dial telephone for an analog
telephone connected to an Analog Station Module (ASM) can
send messages to analog telephones by pressing
.
Depending on the programming setup, the analog telephone
provides either a Stuttered Dial Tone or a Message Waiting
Lamp to inform the user of messages pending.
If your reply to a message is forwarded or is answered at
another telephone using the Call Pickup feature, the message
remains on your telephone until you cancel it or successfully
contact the telephone that sent the message.
For analog telephones connected to an ASM, the message
waiting indicator remains on until the user invokes
˚
. If the analog telephone has the Message
Reply Enhancement feature set to Yes, the message waiting
indicator is turned off automatically after the reply call is
answered no matter from where the call is answered.
For more information about the Message Reply Enhancement
feature, see the Norstar Modular ICS 6.1 Installer Guide.
£ßÞ
1. Press
²Ú
.
2. On a telephone with a two-line display, press ADD.
Note: This step is not necessary on a telephone with a oneline display.
3. Enter the internal number of the person to whom you want
to send the message. The person’s display reads
Message for you.
4. On analog telephones connected to an Analog Station
Module (ASM), the message waiting indicator is activated.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
130 / Communicating in the office
Canceling a message you have sent
1. Press
²£Ú
. The display reads Cancel for:.
2. Enter the internal number of the person to whom you sent
the message.
Viewing your messages
You can receive up to four messages from different
telephones, including your voice message center. A single
message from your voice message center may pertain to
several voice messages.
On a telephone with a one-line display
1. Press
2. Press
²ßÞ
¥ £
. The display shows the first message.
or
to move through your messages.
On a telephone with a two-line display
1. Press MSG. The display shows your first message.
2. Press NEXT to move through your messages.
Replying to a message
You can call the person who sent a message or your voice
message center while you are viewing the message.
â
On a telephone with a one-line display
Press
.
On a telephone with a two-line display
Press CALL.
If you want to call your voice message center using a line other
than the programmed line, exit your message list and dial the
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Communicating in the office / 131
voice message center telephone number using normal dialing
methods.
Replying to a message using an analog telephone
connected to an ASM
On an analog telephone connected to an Analog Station
Module
¥ßÞ
Press ˚
. The system automatically
retrieves and connects the user to the oldest message
sender. (The message can originate from either the
designated direct-dial telephone or the internal voice mail
system.)
If the analog telephone has the Message Reply Enhancement
feature set to Yes, and the sender is the designated direct-dial
telephone, the message waiting indicator is turned off
automatically after the reply call is answered, no matter from
where the call is answered.
¥ßÞ
For analog telephones connected to an ASM, using the
Message Waiting Reply feature (˚
),
retrieves only internal messages sent to the user.
Analog telephones connected to an ASM cannot retrieve
external messages by using the Message Waiting Reply
feature (˚
). For external messages, users
must call back the external voice mail center to retrieve their
messages. When doing so, the message waiting indicator on
the analog telephone is turned off automatically.
Tip - If there is no voice mail system installed, only the
¥ßÞ
²Ú
designated direct-dial telephone can send messages to an
analog telephone connected to an Analog Station Module
(ASM) using
. The analog telephone can in turn
invoke a single digit access code to reach the designated
direct-dial telephone and retrieve messages.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
132 / Communicating in the office
Tip - If the designated direct-dial telephone of an analog
telephone connected to an Analog Station Module (ASM) is
changed, messages sent by the previous designated direct-dial
telephone are kept in the incoming message list of the analog
telephone until they are retrieved.
Removing items from your message list
You can erase a message while you are viewing it in your
message list. If the message is from your voice message center,
this only erases the message notification at your telephone.
You need to erase the voice message at your voice message
center. Refer to your voice message center documentation.
³
On a telephone with a one-line display
Press
.
On a telephone with a two-line display
Press ERASE.
Removing items from your message list using an
analog telephone connected to an ASM
To remove both internal and external messages on an analog
telephone connected to an Analog Station Module
Press ˚
Waiting feature.
£ßÞ
to invoke the Cancel Message
On analog telephones connected to an ASM, the Cancel
Message Waiting feature cancels the oldest message received.
The system no longer provides either a Stuttered Dial Tone or
a Message Waiting Lamp if there are no messages pending.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Communicating in the office / 133
Viewing messages you have sent
On a telephone with a two-line display, you can view the
messages you have sent.
1. Press
²Ú
.
2. Press SHOW to display your first sent message.
3. Press NEXT to move through your sent messages.
Displays
Cancel denied
You have entered an invalid number when
attempting to cancel a message.
Cleared>LINENAM
NEXT
You have cleared an external message
from your message waiting list. The
message itself exists in your voice
message center until you erase it there.
In use: 221
You are trying to call from your message
waiting list. The line that you want to use is
being used by the identified Norstar user.
L001:LINENAMVMsg
NEXT CALL CLEAR
You are viewing your message list. The
display shows the number and name of the
line that was used for your voice mail
message.
Message denied
You have tried to send a message to an
invalid internal number or to a telephone
that is out of service.
Message list
SHOW
ADD
EXIT
SHOW appears only if you have outstanding
messages. Press SHOW to review messages
you have sent. Press ADD to send a new
message.
Message to:
Enter the internal number of the telephone
to which you want to send a message.
Messages & Calls
MSG
CALLS
You have one or more messages and one
or more new Call Logs. Press
to change the first line of the display to the
current time and date.
P0603535 02
²¡âß
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
134 / Communicating in the office
No button free
You have no line button free with which to
reply to a message.
No number stored
There has been no number programmed
for the voice message center. Contact your
voice messaging service provider.
Start of list
NEXT
You are at the beginning of your list of
messages. Press NEXT to move through
your messages.
Their list full
You are trying to send a message to a user
whose message waiting list is full.
Your list full
You have tried to send a message but list
of sent messages on your set is full. Cancel
one of the messages you have sent, if
possible, or wait until you have received a
reply to one of those messages.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
Using Voice Call
²ßß
Use this feature to make an announcement or begin a
conversation through the speaker of another telephone in the
system.
Tip - Hunt Groups cannot accept voice calls. Answer buttons
have no appearances for voice calls, and the telephone does
not ring for voice calls. For more information about Hunt
Groups, see Programming Hunt Groups on page 169. For
more information about Answer buttons, see Answer DNs and
Answer keys on page 63.
Muting Voice Call tones
When a voice call begins at your telephone, you hear a beep
every 15 seconds as a reminder that the microphone is on.
To stop it from beeping, pick up the receiver or press the
handsfree/mute key.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Communicating in the office / 135
Answering a Voice Call with handsfree
If handsfree answerback is assigned to your telephone, you can
respond to a voice call without touching the telephone.
Handsfree answerback is not available to the M7100 or the
T7100 telephones.
When someone makes a voice call to you, simply start talking.
Your telephone microphone picks up your voice.
Once you have answered a voice call, you can put it on hold,
transfer it, or otherwise treat it as a normal call.
Blocking Voice Calls using Voice Call Deny
²¡¡
Use this feature to prevent voice calls to your set. The result is
that Voice calls ring like regular internal calls. Your other calls
proceed normally.
Canceling Voice Call Deny
Press
²£¡¡
.
Displays
Dial voice call
Dial the internal number or press the
internal autodial button of the person to
whom you want to speak.
Microphone muted
Your handsfree microphone is muted.
Press the handsfree/mute key or pick up
your receiver to respond to the voice
call.
Voice call
The line is open for you to speak.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
136 / Communicating in the office
No voice call
The telephone receiving the call cannot
accept voice calls for one of the following
reasons:
• it is active or ringing with another
call
• Call Forward is turned on
• Do Not Disturb is turned on
• Voice Call Deny is turned on
• it is not a Norstar telephone.
Your call proceeds automatically as a
regular ringing call.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Tracking your incoming calls
Using Call Log
Telephones can automatically log Call Display information for
calls on an external line. The line must appear on that
telephone but it does not have to be a ringing line.
If your system is equipped with the appropriate equipment,
and you have subscribed to the call information feature
supplied by your service provider, you are able to capture
information about incoming callers in your call log. The same
feature is supplied by an ISDN service package that comes
with calling line identification (CLID).
Call Log creates a record of incoming external calls. For each
call, the log can contain:
•
•
sequence number in the Call Log
name and number of the caller
•
•
indication if the call was long distance
indication if the call was answered, and identify who
answered it
• time and date of the call
• number of repeated calls from the same source
• name of the line that the call came in on
Call Log can help you to
•
•
•
•
P0603535 02
keep track of abandoned or unanswered calls
track patterns for your callers, for example, volume of calls
and geographical location of calls
record caller information quickly and accurately
build a personal telephone directory from log items
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
138 / Tracking your incoming calls
The long distance indicator and the name and number of the
call may not be shown in the log. This information depends on
the Call Display services provided by your local telephone
company and the local telephone company of the caller.
To use the features on the following pages, your telephone
must have spaces available in its Call log. Your installer or
customer service representative programs each telephone with
an appropriate number of spaces.
Call Log options
With this feature, you can select the type of calls to be stored
in your Call Log. Choose from four Autolog options: No one
answered, Unanswerd by me, Log all calls, No
autologging.
²¥¡Ý
£
²
1. Press
option.
2. Press
3. Press
. The display shows the current
or NEXT to change the option.
or OK to select the display option.
Logging a call manually
²¡ÚÜ
If your calls are not automatically logged, you can manually
log call information when you are connected to an external
call. Storing information for your current call can be helpful in
many situations.
For example, you may want to
•
•
•
record caller information without using paper and pencil
record only selected calls of your choice, rather than
relying on the automatic Call Log
quickly record caller information before a caller hangs up
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Tracking your incoming calls / 139
Enabling and disabling autobumping
Your log has a set number of items that it can hold. When it
becomes full, new calls cannot be logged. When your log is
full, Autobumping automatically deletes the oldest Call Log
item when a new call is logged.
Press
Press
²¡ÚÞ
²£¡ÚÞ
to enable autobumping.
to disable autobumping.
Viewing your Call Log
To view your log:
²¡ÚÛ
1. Press
. The display shows the number or
previously read items (old) and the number of new, unread
items (new) in the log.
£â¥
2. Press
or OLD to view old items.
Press
or NEW to view new items.
Press
or RESUME to display the last item you viewed,
the last time you viewed your Call Log.
Names and numbers for external callers are displayed only if
you have subscribed to Call Display services from your local
telephone company.
Viewing a Call Log item
Ã
Press
log item.
P0603535 02
or MORE to view the information for a call
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
140 / Tracking your incoming calls
Erasing log items
You should routinely erase log items to make space for new
items in your log.
³
¨
³
¨
1. Display the item you want to erase.
2. Press
3. Press
or ERASE.
to exit.
If you accidentally erase an item, you can retrieve it.
1. Press
2. Press
or UNDO immediately.
to exit.
Making a call using Call Log
You may find it helpful to place calls from within your Call
Log. The number stored for each call may vary, depending on
the type of call. For example, if the call was placed from a
Centrex or PBX system, the first few numbers may need to be
trimmed before you can make the call. If the number you want
to call is long distance, or if you want to use a line pool, you
may need to add numbers.
To place a call:
1. Display the log item for the call you want to place.
Ã
2. Display the associated telephone number.
3. Press
want to remove.
or TRIM, once for every digit that you
4. Dial any extra digits required.
5. Press an external line or line pool button.
6. Lift the receiver. (This is not necessary if handsfree is
programmed at your telephone.) The displayed number is
dialed.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Tracking your incoming calls / 141
Creating a password to your Call Log
²¥¡Þ
To access your Call Log through a password:
1. Press
. The displays reads New passwrd:.
2. Enter your four-digit password.
The display reads Repeat New:.
3. Re-enter your four-digit password. The display reads
Password changed, which confirms that your password
has been assigned.
²¡ÚÛ
To enter Call Log using your password:
1. Press
to enter Call Log. If you have
programmed a password, the display reads Password:.
2. Enter your four-digit password.
If you forget your Call Log password, it can be deleted in
programming. See Using passwords on page 224.
Changing your Call Log password
Use this procedure when you want to change the Call Log
password for your telephone.
1. Press
²¥¡Þ
. The display reads Old passwrd:.
2. Enter your old password.
The display reads New passwrd:.
3. Enter your new four-digit password.
The display reads Repeat New:.
4. Re-enter your password.
The display reads Password changed, which confirms
that your password has been changed.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
142 / Tracking your incoming calls
Deleting an assigned password
Use this procedure when you want to delete an assigned
password.
1. Press
²¥¡Þ
. The display reads Old passwrd:.
2. Enter your old password.
³
3. The display reads New passwrd:.
4. Press
or OK.
The display reads No pswd assigned, which confirms
that your password has been deleted.
Programming a telephone to log calls automatically
Your installer or customer service representative can program
each telephone to automatically log calls coming in on a line.
Displays
1:Unknown name
The caller name is unavailable.
1:Unknown number
The caller number is unavailable.
12:KATE SMITH
NEXT ERASE
_ indicates a new item.
MORE
12¯KATE SMITH
NEXT ERASE
MORE
12§KATE SMITH
NEXT ERASE
MORE
49/1234567890123
NEXT ERASE MORE
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
¯ indicates that the call was answered.
§ indicates a long distance call.
/ indicates that the stored number has
been shortened to its final 11 digits. Press
or MORE to display additional
information about the call.
Ã
P0603535 02
Tracking your incoming calls / 143
Call(s) bumped
One or more log entries have been deleted
by the Autobumping feature while you are
looking at the Call Log.
Hold or release
Hold or release your active call before
entering Call Log.
In use: SETNAME
The external line is in use.
Jan 4 9:00a
NEXT ERASE
3X
MORE
The repeat call counter, shown along with
time and date, indicates the number of calls
you received from the same caller.
Line001
NEXT ERASE
¯227
This call was answered at another
telephone (227).
MORE
Line001
¯Logit
NEXT ERASE MORE
This call was logged manually.
Line001
NEXT ERASE
This call was not answered.
MORE
Messages & Calls
MSG
CALLS
There are one or more items in your
message waiting list, and there are one or
more new items in your Call Log. Press
to change the first line of the
display to the current time and date.
New calls begin
You have viewed your last old log item and
now view your new log items.
No info to log
No information is available for the call.
No log assigned
No log space has been assigned to the
telephone.
No resume item
The resume item has been removed
because of Autobumping, repeat call
update, or log reallocation while you are
looking at the Call Log.
²¡âß
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
144 / Tracking your incoming calls
Using external Voice mail
If you subscribe to a voice message service outside your
office, you can access that service through your Norstar
system. Your installer or customer service representative
programs your Norstar telephone to indicate when you have a
voice message waiting on a particular line.
To find out if your external voice message service works with
Norstar, or if you have any problems with your service, contact
your voice message service provider.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Customizing your telephone
Finding out what a button does using
Button Inquiry
²¥â
You can use this feature to check the function of any line,
intercom, or programmed button on your telephone.
On the M7100 and the T7100 telephones, Button Inquiry
shows your internal number followed by the function assigned
to your single memory button.
Displays
001 <LINENAME>
SHOW
OK
The display shows the number and name
of the line. Press SHOW to view the
redirection status of the line.
£
123456789012345...
VIEW‚
OK
Press
or press VIEW‚ or ·VIEW to view
a number that is too long to fit on the
display. Press
or OK when you are
done.
221 <SETNAME>
NEXT VIEW‚
The display shows the directory number of
the telephone, and the assigned name.
Press NEXT to see the first line assigned to
ring at the intercom button.
<Feature name>
SHOW
Press a button
EXIT
OK
³
The name of the feature assigned to a
button is displayed when you press the
button. Press
or SHOW for additional
information.
£
²
Press the button you want to check. Press
or EXIT when you are finished.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
146 / Customizing your telephone
Changing the set display contrast
Use this feature to adjust the contrast on your set.
1. Press
²¥à
.
2. Press a number on the dialpad to choose the contrast level
you prefer.
On a two-line telephone, you can use the UP and DOWN display
buttons to adjust the contrast. The number of contrast levels
available varies from one telephone model to another.
Changing the language on the display
You can select the language used on the display of each set.
The languages supported depends on which Profile was
installed on your system at Startup.
English is the default first language.
Refer to the Modular ICS 6.1 Installer Guide for a list of
languages supported by each profile. Check the programming
guide to determine which Profile was assigned to your system.
²¥ÞâÚ
You can program
, the first language code,
on to a memory button. If you want subsequent languages to
display, you can keep pressing the button until the language
code you want appears on the display.
²¥ÞâÛ ²¥ÞâÜ
You cannot program
onto a memory button.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
or
P0603535 02
Customizing your telephone / 147
Programming a feature code onto a
memory button
You can program a feature code onto a memory button. In
some cases, pressing the button a second time cancels the
feature.
Programming feature buttons
Any memory button not programmed as an external or internal
line, target line, Answer button, or handsfree/mute button, is
available for features.
1. Press
²¥Ü
.
2. Press the memory button you want to program with a
feature.
3. Enter the appropriate feature code you want to assign onto
the button.
²¥à¥
The following feature codes cannot be programmed onto a
memory button: Long Tones and any code beginning with
except
(Language Choice) and
(Contrast Adjustment).
²¥ÞâÚ
Tip - When you program a button with the line pool feature
code, you must enter a line pool access code after the feature
code. The programmed line pool button accesses a specific line
pool, not the line pool feature.
Erasing a feature button
1. Press
²¥Ú
³
.
2. Press the feature button.
3. Press
P0603535 02
or OK to erase the button.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
148 / Customizing your telephone
Displays
<Feature name>
SHOW
The name of the feature assigned to a button
OK is displayed when you press the button. SHOW
£
appears when there is more information
available. Press
or SHOW for additional
information.
Enter code:
If you are checking a speed dial button, enter
the three-digit speed dial code that you want
to check.
F__
QUIT
Enter the feature code, or press
or QUIT
to quit programming or CLEAR to clear the
numbers you have entered. The system
accepts the entry as soon as you enter a
valid feature code.
¨
CLEAR
²
Feature code:
QUIT
Press
and enter the feature code you
want to assign to the button. You cannot
enter invalid codes.
Feature moved
You programmed a button with a feature that
was already programmed onto another
button. The feature has moved to the button
you just programmed. Its original button is
now blank.
Press a button
EXIT
Press the button you want to check. Press
or EXIT when you are finished.
Program and HOLD
Enter the number you want to program and
press
. To erase the button, just press
.
Program and OK
QUIT
²
³³
OK
³
Enter the number you want to program and
press OK. To erase the button, just press
or OK.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Customizing your telephone / 149
Labeling your set
The Business Series Terminals have label strips that come
with each telephone. You can print the label for each button on
your telephone and install the strip beside the buttons. The
Norstar M-series telephones have individual keycap labels.
This section suggests the process for setting up the labelling
for your set.
Applying button labelling
²¥â
Before you apply button labels, use the Button Inquiry feature
(
) to verify the button functions, and to avoid
activating features as you put the labels onto the buttons. For
more information refer to Finding out what a button does
using Button Inquiry on page 145.
Business Series Terminals
The T-series telephones are labelled beside the buttons. You
can use the Desktop Assistant utility to make changes and print
a new label card. Your system administrator can access this
application from the system CD or it can be downloaded from
http://www.nortelnetworks.com (Choose: Customer Support/
Software Distribution, under Product Selection choose
Desktop Assistant).
Business Series Terminal T7316 button label locations
Button
labels
T7316
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
150 / Customizing your telephone
Norstar button caps
The Norstar M-series has two types of button caps:
• Unlabeled, clear button caps with appropriate green or
grey paper for line numbers, telephone numbers, and
features
•
Pre-printed, colored button caps in green or grey
Some examples of pre-printed button caps
Green caps
Grey caps
∫Line 1
µ
©
ß
Tips - To make identification of line types easier, use
preprinted green button caps for lines that support incoming
and outgoing calls. Use clear button caps for target lines that
are incoming only.
Default button assignments
During Startup, the Norstar installer chooses one of the
available templates. Default features are assigned
automatically to the programmable buttons on installed sets.
These defaults vary depending on the template you choose,
and the style of telephone.
The default features are listed mapped out below.
Tips - Norstar M-series telephones are shipped from the
factory with the button caps in place for the Square template.
Please consult your customer service representative to
determine the type of template programmed into your system.
Not all templates are available in all software loads.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Customizing your telephone / 151
T7316E Business Series Terminal button defaults
The default button assignments for the T7316E Business
Series Terminal (BST) depend on the template applied. Refer
to your Programming Records to identify the current button
programming for each telephone or group of telephones.
Note also that this telephone has a separate handsfree button
(under the dial pad). Also, the current incoming call on this
telephone defaults to the voice path last used. For example, if
you answered the previous call using your headset, the next
call will come in over your headset.
Line numbering starts on button 09.
T7316E BST upper buttons (PBX/DID template)
01 ∫Contrast
02 ∫Show Time
03
04
05
06 ∫Sys Park
07 ∫Send Msg
08 ∫Speed dial
(DID only)
T7316E BST lower buttons (PBX and DID)
PBX template
DID template
09 ∫Sys Park
17 ∫Call Timer
09 ∫Line<xx>
17 ∫Call Timer
10 ∫Saved No.
18 ∫Ring Again
10 ∫Saved No.
18 ∫Ring Again
11 ∫Call Fwd
19 ∂
11 ∫Call Fwd
19 ∂
12 œ
13 π
14 †
12 œ
13 π
14 †
15 ∫Time/Date
20 ç
21 µ
22 ≈
23 ∆
15 ∫Time/Date
20 ç
21 µ
22 ≈
23 ∆
16 ∫Receive msg
24 ∆
16 ∫Receive msg
24 ∆
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
152 / Customizing your telephone
T7316E BST upper buttons (Hybrid template)
01 ∫Contrast
02 ∫Show Time
03 ∫Privacy
04
05 ∫Saved No.
06 ∫Sys Park
07 ∫Send Msg
08 ∫Speed dial
T7316E BST upper buttons (Centrex template)
01 ∫Contrast
02 ∫Show Time
05 ∫Saved No.
06 ∫Sys Park
03
04
07 ∫Send Msg
08 ∫Speed dial
T7316E BST lower buttons (Hybrid and Centrex
Hybrid template
Centrex template
09 ∫Line<xx>
17 ∫Call Timer
01
09 ∫Call Timer
10 ∫Line Pool
18 ∫Ring Again
02 ∫Call Fwd
10 ∫Ring Again
11 ∫Call Fwd
19 ∂
03 œ 11 ∂
12 œ
20 ç
04 π 12 ç
13 π
14 †
21 µ
22 ≈
05 † 13 µ
14 ≈
06 ∫Time/Date
15 ∫Time/Date
23 ∆
07 ∫Leave msg
15 ∆
16 ∫Receive msg
24 ∆
08 ∫Flash
16 ∆
T7316E BST upper buttons (Square template)
01 ∫Contrast
02 ∫Show Time
03 ∫Privacy
04 ∫
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
05 ∫Svd N redial
06 ∫Sys Park
07 ∫Send Msg
08 ∫Speed dial
P0603535 02
Customizing your telephone / 153
T7316E BST lower buttons (Square template)
Button #/
Function
Square template
Button #/
Function
09 ∫Line<xx>
17 ∫Call Timer
10 ∫Line<xx>
18 ∫Ring Again
11 ∫Call Fwd
19 ∂
12 œ
13 π
14 †
15 ∫Time/Date
20 ç
21 µ
22 ≈
23 ∆
16 ∫Receive msg
24 ∆
T7316 Business Series Terminal button defaults
The default button assignments for the T7316 Business Series
Terminal (BST) depend on the template applied. Refer to your
Programming Records to identify the current button
programming for each telephone or group of telephones.
Note the button numbering for some of buttons of this
telephone are not consecutive. This is because the buttons are
mapped to the M7310. However, since there is no second level
to the memory buttons on this telephone, the button numbers
only reflect the lower level. In Button programming, however,
the absent button numbers appear, but they are not valid
programming for this telephone.
These examples show defaults for a system with three-digit
internal numbers. The defaults do not actually exist on any
telephone, as no telephone has an autodial button for itself.
The position that would be taken by the autodial button for
itself is blank.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
154 / Customizing your telephone
T7316 BST upper buttons
Button 23 ∫Set 227
Button 25 ∫Set 228
Button 27 ∫Set 229
Button 29 ∫Set 230
Button 31 ∫Set 231
Button 33 ∫Set 232
Button 24 ∫Set 239
Button 26 ∫Set 240
T7316 BST lower buttons
Button #/
Function
PBX template
Button #/
Function
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
15 ∫Set 223
21 ∫Set 226
01 ∂
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
05 π
10 ∆
DID template
Square template
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
15 ∫Set 223
21 ∫Set 226
15 ∫Set 223
21 ∫Set 226
01 ∫Line<xx>
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
01 ∫Line 1
02 ∫Line 2
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Customizing your telephone / 155
Hybrid template
Centrex template
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
15 ∫Set 223
21 ∫Set 226
15 ∫Set 223
21 ∫Set 226
01 ∫Line 1
02 ø
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
01 ∫Line<xx>
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 ˚
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
M7310 telephone button defaults
The default button assignments for the M7310 telephone
depend on the template applied. The exception is the default
numbering for the dual memory buttons. Refer to Using
Buttons on page 16.
M7310 lower button assignments
The following tables map the positions for the lower set of
buttons for the Norstar M7310 telephone.
Button #/
Function
Square template
Button #/
Function
01 ∫Line
1
02 ∫Line 2
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
06
05 π
10
P0603535 02
ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
∆
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
156 / Customizing your telephone
PBX template
01 ∂
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
Hybrid template
ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
01 ∫Line 1
02 ø
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
06
Centrex template
01 ∫Line<xx>
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 ˚
ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
06
DID template
06 ç
01 ∫Line<xx>
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
M7310 with dual memory buttons
*12 ∫Set
233
11 ∫Set 221
*14∫Set 234
13 ∫Set 222
*16∫Set 235
15 ∫Set 223
*18∫Set 236
17 ∫Set 224
*20∫Set 237
*28∫Set 241
∫Set 225
*22∫Set 238
21 ∫Set 226
*24∫Set 239
23 ∫Set 227
*26∫Set 240
25 ∫Set 228
27 ∫Set 229
19
*30∫Set 242
29 ∫Set 230
*32∫Set 243
31 ∫Set 231
*34∫Set 244
33 ∫Set 232
Note: This example
shows defaults for a
system with three-digit
internal numbers. The
defaults do not actually
exist on any telephone,
as no telephone has an
autodial button for itself.
The position that would
be taken by the autodial
button for itself, is blank.
* These settings are
produced using the shift
key, located beside the
upper set of buttons.
Shift key
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Customizing your telephone / 157
M7324 telephone button defaults
The default button assignments for the M7324 telephone
depend on the template applied during startup. Refer to Using
Buttons on page 16.
Square template
# Function
# Function
01 ∫Line 1
02 ∫Line 2
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13 ∫Call Fwd
14 ß
15 µ
16 ∫Saved No.
17 ç
18 †
19 ∂
20 œ
21 ≈
22 π
23 ∆
24 ∆
PBX template
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
P0603535 02
13 ∫Call Fwd
14 ß
15 µ
16 ∫Saved No.
17 ç
18 †
19 ∂
20 œ
21 ≈
22 π
23 ∆
24 ∆
Hybrid template
01 ∫Line 1
02 ø
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13 ∫Call Fwd
14 ß
15 µ
16 ∫Saved No.
17 ç
18 †
19 ∂
20 œ
21 ≈
22 π
23 ∆
24 ∆
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
158 / Customizing your telephone
Centrex template
01 ∫Line<xx>
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
DID template
13 ∫Call Fwd
14 ß
15 µ
16 ˚
17 ç
18 †
19 ∂
20 œ
21 ≈
22 π
23 ∆
24 ∆
∫Line<xx>
†
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
13 ∫Call Fwd
14 ß
15 µ
16 ∫Saved No.
17 ç
18 †
19 ∂
20 œ
21 ≈
22 π
23 ∆
24 ∆
M7208 and T7208 button defaults
The default button assignments for the M7208 and the T7208
sets are the same, depending on which template was applied.
M7208 button set
Square template
T7208 button set
01 ∫Line 1
02 ∫Line 2
03 µ
04 π
05 ç
06 ß
07 ∆
08 ∆
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Customizing your telephone / 159
Centrex template
Hybrid template
PBX template
DID template
01 ∫Line<xx>
01 ∫Line 1
02 †
02 ø 02 † 02 †
03 µ
03 µ 03 µ 03 µ
04 ˚
04 π 04 π 04 π
05 ç
05 ç 05 ç 05 ç
06 ß
06 ß 06 ß 06 ß
07 ∆
07 ∆ 07 ∆ 07 ∆
08 ∆
08 ∆ 08 ∆ 08 ∆
01 œ 01 ∫Line<xx>
²ßÛ
Tips - The default Page button activates the External Page
option (
).
M7100 and T7100 button defaults
For all templates, the one programmable button on the M7100
and the T7100 sets is defaulted to µ.
Rules of default button assignment
•
Line and Intercom buttons are assigned by default
templates and can be changed in programming.
•
Handsfree/mute and answer DN buttons are not assigned
by default. If these features are defined, however, they are
automatically assigned to specific buttons, as described on
this and the following page.
•
None of these buttons can be assigned to M7100 or T7100
telephones, as telephones have only one program button.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
160 / Customizing your telephone
•
The handsfree/mute feature appears on the bottom righthand button on the M7310 telephone and the bottom
button on the M7208 telephone, moving the Intercom
button(s) up one position. The Business Series Terminals
have a separate mute button, which is located under the
numeric dialpad, beneath the volume rocker button. The
T7316E telephone also has a separate handsfree button,
located beside the mute button, however, this button only
works if the telephone is connected to a system that is
version 6.1 or later.
•
Each telephone can have up to eight Intercom buttons.
These buttons assign to the position above the
handsfree/mute button, if there is one, at the bottom righthand button position, if there is two columns of buttons.
•
Each telephone can have up to eight answer DN buttons.
On the M7310 and T7316/T7316E telephones, they appear
above Intercom buttons in the right column and continue
up from the bottom in the left column, replacing the
features on those buttons. On the M7208 and T7208
telephones, answer DN buttons appear above the Intercom
buttons and below external line buttons in a single column.
•
External line buttons appear in ascending line order,
starting at the top button in the left column of the M7310
Norstar and M7208 and T7208 telephones. If more than
five external lines are assigned to an M7310 telephone, or
more than 12 to an M7324 telephone, assignment
continues down the buttons on the right column, erasing
the features on those buttons. Line buttons have priority
over feature access buttons but not handsfree/mute,
Intercom, or answer DN buttons.
The T7316 starts lines at button 01, which is the fourth
button down, on the left side of the lower button set.
The T7316E starts line numbering at button 09, which is
the left top corner of the lower button set. Refer to the
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Customizing your telephone / 161
default charts for specific button placement for these
telephones.
Moving line buttons
You can move external lines, hunt group appearances, and
target line appearances to different buttons on your telephone,
to arrange your lines in the way that makes the most sense to
you. If you have a CAP, you cannot move intercom, answer
keys or handsfree/mute buttons onto the module, but you can
move your lines over to the modules. If you have a T7316E
CAP with eKIMs you can move lines, target line appearances
and hunt group appearances over to the KIM.
1. Press
²¥¡Ú
.
2. Press the button you want to move the line from.
3. Press the button you want to move the line to.
Displays
Exchanged
The two buttons you selected have
exchanged position.
Invalid location
You have tried to move a line to a button that
cannot be used as a line button, such as an
intercom button, handsfree/mute button, or
an answer button.
Move line from:
QUIT
Press the button of the line you want to
move. Press
or QUIT when you have
finished moving lines.
Move line to:
QUIT
Press the button you want to move the line
to. Neither of the buttons is erased. The
lines, or the line and feature, simply switch
places.
Press a line
The button you are trying to move is not a
line button. If you are trying to switch a line
and a feature, move the line to the feature
button and not the feature button to the line.
P0603535 02
²
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
162 / Customizing your telephone
Changing the type of ring
You can choose one of four distinctive rings for your
telephone. This makes it easier to identify your telephone in an
open office.
1. Press
²¥ß
ÚÛÜÝ
.
2. Press
,
,
,
, or NEXT. You hear the selected
ring for two seconds.
3. Repeat until you hear the ring you prefer, then press
or OK.
³
Adjusting the Ring volume
Use this feature to adjust the ring volume.
1. Press
²¥¡â
Ã
. The telephone rings.
2. Press
to adjust the volume; left end for lower
and right end for higher.
Hiding the message or calls indication
The display that shows you have messages or calls can be
replaced with the current time and date. You can retrieve your
message and call information by using the display buttons that
appear on the second line of the display. If you are using a
telephone with a single-line display, the message or call
indication is hidden.
²¡âß
²ßÞ
²¡ÚÛ
1. Press
. The current time and date appears on
the top line of the display.
2. Press MSG or
CALLS or
to see your messages, or press
to see your calls.
²£¡âß
Restoring the messages and calls indication
Press
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
.
P0603535 02
User Preferences
The User Preferences section of programming allows you to
program memory buttons, speed dial codes and other settings
for any Norstar or BST telephone on the system.
For example, an employee may want to have the Do Not
Disturb feature programmed onto a memory button or create a
speed dial code. Instead of programming from the each
specific set, you can go into programming on the telephone
nearest you to make the change.
Using User Preferences
²¥¥èêäå ²¥¥¡àÜà
ÛÛàÝÛ
1. Press
(
).
2. Enter the Basic password (the default passwords is
). (Note: You can also use the Coordinator
password to change User preferences.
By using a Basic password, it is possible to have someone else
do day-to-day upkeep of the telephone programming without
giving out access to sensitive programming. See Using
passwords on page 224.
After you enter the proper password, the display shows you the
telephone with the lowest internal number followed by its
name (For example, 221:Reception).
1. Press ‘ to move through all the telephones on the
system.
2. Press ≠ when you see the telephone you want to
change. The display reads the model number of the
telephone at the extension.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
164 / User Preferences
The display shows Connect set if no telephone is
connected at that internal number.
You cannot make changes if the model is Other.
3. Press ‘ to move through all the subheadings in
User Preferences.
User Preferences programming is available under the heading
Terminals&Sets.
Sub-headings in User Preferences
User prefernces
Model
Button prgrming
User speed dial
Call log opt’ns
Dialing opt’ns
Language
Display cntrst
Ring type
Changing button programming
1. Press ≠ at Button prgrming. The display shows
the number of buttons on the telephone. An example is
shown in Displays at the end of this section.
If the telephone has a CAP module, you can press CAP1 or
KIM1 to see the buttons on the module.
2. Press ‘ to move through all the buttons on the
telephone. Refer to Default button assignments on page
150 for button number mapping for each type telephone.
3. Use the display buttons to change the programming for a
button.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
User Preferences / 165
The display buttons used in button programming.
CANCL
Moves you out of a setting without making any changes to
it.
CLR
Erases the button.
TEL#
Programs the key as an autodial number for an internal or
an external number. If it is an external autodial number, you
must choose a line, line pool, or the routing table for the call
to use.
CHANGE
Used when you are setting up an external autodial number.
Press CHANGE until you see the type of line or pool you want
the number to use.
FEATR
Press to store a feature code on the button.
FIND
Locates a specific button on a telephone by entering its
number. Button numbers are shown in the illustrations.
LIST
Takes you to a list of feature codes. Press ‘ to
move through the list and press OK when you see the
feature you want to program on the button.
Note: User Preferences programming cannot change the
buttons that are used by lines, intercom, and the handsfree
feature, which are assigned by the system administrator. Refer
to the Modular ICS 6.1 Installer Guide for details.
Changing User Speed Dial
1. Press ≠ at User Speed Dial. The display shows
the number of speed dial codes that are available.
2. Press ‘ to see the first speed dial code (256).
3. Press ‘ to move through all the speed dial codes.
4. Press ≠ to find the code you want to change.
5. Press CHANGE and enter the telephone number the same
way you would dial it on the telephone.
6. Press OK.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
166 / User Preferences
7. Press ‘ and choose the line (or enter a code for a
line pool) the speed dial code should use.
Use the line pool code to select a particular line pool for use
with Speed Dial. If you select Use routing tbl, a line or pool
is chosen by the routing programming according to the initial
digits in the number.
The route you choose for a User Speed Dial code must be one
that the telephone can use. For example, if the telephone does
not have access to Line Pool B and you use that pool code with
the speed dial code, the code does not work. Lines and line
pools are assigned to the telephones by the system
administrator. Refer to the Modular ICS 6.1 Installer Guide
for details.
To change a system speed dial code, see Adding or changing
a system speed dial on page 31.
Changing Call Log options
1. Press ≠ at Call log opt’ns….
2. Press CHANGE until you see the option you want to use. See
Call Log options on page 138.
Changing how calls are dialed
1. Press ≠ at Dialing opt’ns….
2. Press CHANGE until you see the option you want to use.
Descriptions for dialing options are found on the Telephone
Feature Card, or see Changing how you dial your calls on
page 82.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
User Preferences / 167
Changing the language used on the display
Press CHANGE at Language: until you see the language you
want to use. See Changing the language on the display on page
146.
Making the display lighter or darker
Press CHANGE at Display cntrst until you see the value you
want to use.
The display contrast on the telephone you are using for the
programming session does not change when you are
programming another telephone.
Changing the ring type
At Ring type:, press CHANGE until you see the option you
want to use.
Descriptions for ringing options are found on the Telephone
Feature Card or in Changing the type of ring on page 162.
Displays
10+24 buttons
There are 10 memory buttons and 12 dual
FIND memory buttons on the telephone you are
viewing. Press ‘ to begin looking at
what is on each button.
A line appears on the button. You cannot
B01:L06:Line 001
FIND store a feature or number on it.
B02:#Reply Msg...
A feature is stored on this button. Press
CLR
TEL# FEATR ≠ to see the feature code. A full list
of names and codes for features is included
in the index.
Code:F#65...
CLR
TEL#
Shows the feature code stored on a button.
FEATR Press ≠ to see the button number
and feature name.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
168 / User Preferences
The button has a telephone number stored
B03:160455512...
CLR
TEL# FEATR on it. Press ≠to see the rest of the
number.
The autodial is an external number. Press
Externl tel #...
CLR
TEL# FEATR ≠ to see what line or pool the call is
programmed to go out on.
The autodial is an internal number. Press
Internl tel #...
CLR
TEL# FEATR ≠ to see more information.
The button is used for intercom. Press
B04:Intercom...
FIND ≠ to see more information about the
button. You cannot store a feature or number
on it.
B05:Ansr 93
The button is used for an Answer DN. You
FIND cannot store a feature or number on it.
Either nothing is stored on the button or you
B06:Blank button
CLR
TEL# FEATR have just cleared the button by pressing CLR .
The button is occupied by the handsfree
B10:Handsfree
FIND feature. You cannot store a feature or
number on it.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Programming Hunt Groups
The Hunt Groups feature allows a group of Norstar or BST
telephones to be called by a single directory number ensuring
that calls are easily routed to the appropriate group.
The Incoming Line Group (ILG) functionality is now
accomplished through the Hunt Group feature.
When upgrading from a pre-Modular ICS 4.0 system
to a Modular ICS 6.1 system, any lines previously
belonging to an ILG are not automatically converted
to broadcast Hunt Groups. You must go in and
program them to the new feature. Please refer to
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group on page
173.
Hunt Groups are used in situations where a group of people
performing the same task are required to answer a number of
related phone queries. Some typical uses of Hunt Groups are:
•
a sales department answering questions on product prices
or availability
•
a support department answering questions concerning the
operation of a product
•
an emergency department answering calls for help.
Hunt Groups can be used to route calls to a support service
such as a Help Line for a software company. Specialists
dealing with Product A can be in one group, and specialists
dealing with Product B can be in another group. Incoming
calls hunt for the next available telephone in the group. If no
telephone is available, the call can be placed in a queue or
routed to telephone designated as the overflow set.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
170 / Programming Hunt Groups
The Hunt Groups subheading in system programming is the
area where programming changes are made to the following:
•
members of a group
•
•
•
member position in a group
what lines are assigned to a group
how incoming calls are distributed
•
•
how long the system looks for available members
where a call goes if all members are busy
Note: Videophones should not be programmed as members of
a Hunt Group. Hunt Groups allow one B channel
connection at a time and videophones use two B
channels.
Features affected by Hunt Groups include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forward All Calls
Call Forward No Answer
Call Forward on Busy
Group Pickup
Transfer via Hold
Priority Call
•
•
•
Line Redirection
Page Zones
Voice Call
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 171
Adding or removing members from a
group
A DN for a telephone can be associated as a member of a Hunt
Group, and is called a member DN.
Members of the group can be any Norstar or Business Series
Terminal telephone, ISDN terminal, or portables. A telephone
can be in more than one Hunt Group but is considered a
member in each Hunt Group, increasing the total number of
members in the system.
There can be only one appearance of the Hunt Group on a
telephone, no matter how many lines are assigned to the group.
Hunt Group DNs cannot be members of other Hunt Groups.
Consult your customer service representative to determine
your Hunt Group number range.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on your
programming set.
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
display shows Password:.
3. Press
Terminals&Sets.
(CONFIG). The
(ADMIN). The display shows
4. The display shows Terminals&Sets.
5. Press ‘ until the display shows System
prgrming.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Show group.
8. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30)
or press ‘ to scroll through the groups.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
172 / Programming Hunt Groups
9. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs.
10. Press ≠. The display shows the first group
member, if there are members.
11. Press ADD and enter a telephone DN to add a member to the
group. Press REMOVE to remove a member from the group.
Press ‘ to move through the list.
12. Press
¨
to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Moving members of a group
Member order within a Hunt Group is important. The member
order determines how a call is routed through a Hunt Group.
1. At Hunt groups, press ≠. The display shows
Show group.
2. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30)
or press ‘ to scroll through the groups.
3. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
4. Press ≠. The display shows the members for that
group.
5. Press MOVE to move an existing member to another place
within the Hunt Group. The display shows the member
number followed by an arrow.
¨
6. Enter the new position number for the extension.
7. Press
to exit.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 173
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group
You can assign one or several lines to a hunt group.
Hunt group line notes:
•
Configure the prime set for a Hunt Group line to None to
avoid delayed ring transfer of external Hunt Group calls to
the prime set before the Hunt Group can receive the call.
•
A line can be assigned to only one group.
•
Do not assign any hunt group lines to individual
telephones. If any of the telephones that are part of the hunt
group have the line assigned, remove the line from the
telephone before assigning it to the hunt group.
1. At Hunt groups, press ≠. The display shows
Show group.
2. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30)
or press ‘ to scroll through the groups.
3. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
4. Press ‘. The display shows Line assignment.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Show line:.
6. Enter the line number you want to program or press SCAN
to go to the first line assigned to this group, or press LIST
to go to the first line in the system.
7. Press CHANGE to program the line as Unassigned or
Assigned.
*HGnn* means the line is assigned to another Hunt Group.
8. Press
P0603535 02
¨
to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
174 / Programming Hunt Groups
Setting the distribution mode
There are three modes of call distribution:
•
Broadcast—rings each telephone in the group
simultaneously. Calls are handled one at a time, while
succeeding calls are queued. As soon as a call is picked up,
the call next in the queue is presented immediately to the
group.
In Broadcast mode, a single incoming call rings
simultaneously at all the telephones in a group. This way,
all receptionists in the group can share the load of
answering large volumes of calls. All telephones
automatically display the calling line identification
(CLID), if available. A familiar example is a fund-raising
campaign where a group of operators are waiting to take
each call as it comes in.
•
Sequential—starts the call at the first telephone in the
Hunt Group. Distribution is complete when the first idle
telephone is found. Simultaneous calls can be presented.
Distribution is order based.
In Sequential mode, you can program your top salesperson
to be the first member of the group to receive calls.
•
Rotary—the call starts at the telephone after the one
which answered the last call. Distribution is complete
when the next idle telephone has been found.
Simultaneous calls can be presented. Distribution is order
based.
In Rotary mode, you can ensure that all your helpline
people are receiving calls on an equal basis, rather than one
person receiving the majority of calls. The call rings at one
set at a time in a round robin fashion.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 175
If a Hunt Group has available members but nobody answers
the call, the call is rerouted through the list until someone
answers the call. If all lines are busy, the call is routed
according to whatever has been set for the busy line setting.
Refer to ‘Programming busy line setting’ on pa ge176.
1. At Hunt groups, press ≠. The display shows
Show group.
2. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30)
or press ‘ to scroll through the groups.
3. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Mode.
¨
5. Press CHANGE to set the mode: Broadcast, Sequential,
Rotary.
6. Press
to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Setting the hunt delay
This setting allows you to program the number of rings the
system permits at a Hunt Group telephone before moving on
to the next telephone in the Hunt Group.
1. At Hunt groups, press ≠. The display shows
Show group.
2. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30)
or press ‘ to scroll through the groups.
3. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hunt delay.
¨
5. Press CHANGE to select the setting: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10.
6. Press
P0603535 02
to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
176 / Programming Hunt Groups
Programming busy line setting
A Hunt Group is considered busy if one of two scenarios
exists:
•
all of its members are being presented an incoming Hunt
Group call
•
all of its members are active on a Hunt Group call
There are three routing options if all members are busy:
•
BusyTone—the caller gets a busy tone (PRI lines only)
•
Overflow—the call is routed to an overflow position. If
the overflow DN is the hunt group DN for that same hunt
group, the overflow option will not appear.
•
Queue—the call stays in the system for a period of time.
Within this period of time, the call is presented to an
member if one becomes available. When the time-out
occurs, the call is presented to an overflow position.
1. At Hunt groups, press ≠. The display shows
Show group.
2. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30)
or press ‘ to scroll through the groups.
3. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows If busy:.
¨
5. Press CHANGE to set the mode: BusyTone, Overflow,
Queue.
6. Press
to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 177
Programming the queue time-out
This setting allows you to program the number of seconds a
call remains in the Hunt Group queue before it is routed to the
overflow position.
1. At Hunt groups, press ≠. The display shows
Show group.
2. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30)
or press ‘ to scroll through the groups.
3. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Q Timeout:.
¨
5. Press CHANGE to set the queue time-out: 15, 30, 45, 60,
120, 180.
6. Press
to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Programming the overflow set
This setting allows you to program the overflow telephone to
which the Hunt Group calls are to be routed. Unless the
overflow position is a Hunt Group telephone, the call ceases to
be a Hunt Group call. If the overflow telephone is a Hunt
Group telephone, the call is treated as a new call and goes to
the bottom of the queue.
The overflow telephone can be a DN number associated with
a voice mailbox.
1. At Hunt groups, press ≠. The display shows
Show group.
2. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30)
or press ‘ to scroll through the groups.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
178 / Programming Hunt Groups
3. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
4. Press ‘ until he display shows Overflow:.
5. Press CHANGE to change the overflow position.
¨
6. Enter the new overflow position.
7. Press
to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Setting the name
This setting allows you to program the Hunt Group name, such
as Service or Sales. The name can be up to seven characters in
length. This name becomes the CLID display name when the
DN is called.
1. At Hunt groups, press ≠. The display shows
Show group.
2. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30)
or press ‘ to scroll through the groups.
3. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Name:.
5. Press CHANGE.
6. Use the dialpad to enter the name of the Hunt Group.
¨
7. Press ‘ to store the name.
8. Press
to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 179
Allowing/disallowing an auxiliary ringer
This setting allows you to allow/disallow an external ringer to
sound when a call comes in for a specific hunt group. If you
allow this service, you must have an auxiliary ringer properly
installed on your system. Refer to Using an auxiliary ringer on
page 233.
1. At Hunt groups, press ≠. The display shows
Show group.
2. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30)
or press ‘ to scroll through the groups.
3. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Aux. Ringer:.
¨
5. Press CHANGE to choose Y (yes) to turn the ringer on or N
(No) to disallow an auxiliary ringer.
6. Press
to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a
Hunt Group
You can assign distinctive ring patterns to your Hunt Group so
that calls can be rated in priority for the group. These
distinctive ring patterns have the same characteristics as for
line and extension distinctive ring patterns.
The Hunt Group distinctive ring pattern determines how a call
will ring within the Hunt Group. If members of the group have
ring patterns assigned to their telephones that are higher than
the ring patterns of the incoming line or the Hunt Group, then
the Hunt Group will use the ring of the corresponding member
telephones.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
180 / Programming Hunt Groups
If the incoming call (line) has a higher ring pattern assigned
than the Hunt Group, the Hunt Group will ring with the line
ring pattern.
1. At Hunt groups, press ≠. The display shows
Show group.
2. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to program (1-30)
or press ‘ to scroll through the groups.
3. Press ≠. The display shows Member DNs:.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Dstnct
Ring:NONE.
¨
5. Press CHANGE to toggle to the ring pattern number you
want to assign to the Hunt group line. (None, 2, 3, 4)
6. Press
to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Using Silent Monitor
When silent monitor is activated on your system, you can use
your SM supervisor two-line display telephone to monitor
Hunt group calls based on which DN you select to monitor.
Refer to the Modular ICS Installation Guide for detailed
information about the fields that make up this feature.
To start a session, on a silent monitor supervisor telephone:
1. Enter ²¥ÞÞâ.
2. Type in the SM password (default: SILENT (745368))
3. Enter the DN of the hunt group telephone you want to
monitor and press OK.
If that telephone is currently on a Hunt group call, you will
be automatically connected to the call. If the telephone is
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 181
idle or not on a hunt group call, you will be prompted to
pick another DN to monitor.
Tips - Your telephone is muted by default at the
beginning of any monitoring session. Press the
handsfree/mute button or the display key under JOIN to
enter the conversation.
To end a session: Press ¨, or press the display key under
OTHER or EXIT.
While attempting to monitor a call, or during a call, you may
get one of the following prompts:
OBSERVE
RETRY
OK
Enter the DN for the Hunt Group
telephone that you want to monitor. If you
make a mistake entering a DN number,
press RETRY and re-enter the number. If
the number you entered is correct, press
OK.
The system redisplays this prompt if it is
unable to establish a session with the
telephone DN that you enter.
OTHER JOIN
EXIT
While a call is being monitored, you can
choose to:
• move to another Hunt group member
(OTHER)
• join the current conversation (JOIN)
• exit the silent monitoring (EXIT)
OTHER LEAVE EXIT
When you join a monitored call, you can
choose to:
• move to another Hunt group member
(OTHER)
• mute your telephone out of the
current conversation (this does not
disconnect silent monitoring) (JOIN)
• exit the silent monitoring (EXIT)
Access denied
P0603535 02
You tried to start a monitoring session on
a telephone that does not support the
feature.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
182 / Programming Hunt Groups
Needs Handsfree
You entered the silent monitor feature
code without picking up the handset, and
the telephone does not support handsfree
operation.
Release calls
You entered the silent monitor feature
code on a telephone that already has an
active call. To continue, you will have to
release it.
Your number
You entered your own DN.
Invalid number
The DN you entered is invalid for your
system.
Not in Service
The DN you entered did not respond to the
system.
Not HG member
The DN you entered is not a Hunt Group
member.
Supervisor
The DN you entered belongs to another
Supervisor. You cannot monitor SM
supervisor telephones.
Not Supported
The DN you entered belongs to a portable
telephone or an ISDN terminal.
DN: Idle
OTHER
EXIT
Need I/C key
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
The current call on the telephone you are
monitoring is either not a Hunt Group call,
or the call came in on a line key on that
telephone.
Note: You should not assign lines which
are assigned to the hunt group to
individual hunt group members
No intercom key is currently available to
support the feature.
P0603535 02
Programming Hunt Groups / 183
Feature notes
•
You can only monitor external hunt group calls.
•
You must release all calls on your supervisor telephone
before you attempt to run a monitoring session.
•
The DN you choose to monitor must be a designated
member of a hunt group.
•
The supervisor telephone can be part of a hunt group.
Supervisor telephones cannot be monitored.
•
If the hunt group call gets transferred, the session is
dropped because the call is no longer a hunt group call.
•
If any of the parties release the call, the monitoring session
is dropped, and the supervisor will be prompted to pick
another DN to monitor.
•
To transfer a session to your handset when you start the
monitoring session in handsfree mode, press the OTHER
key and re-enter the DN, otherwise the session will
continue on your telephone speaker.
•
If your telephone is in Silent Monitor idle mode, and you
press the Intercom key, the monitoring session will
terminate.
•
You can monitor calls that are forwarded to a hunt group
member.
•
If the call is parked, attached to a SWCA key, put on Hold,
or camped, Silent Monitor will drop the monitoring
session and the supervisor will receive an indication that
the hunt group telephone is now idle.
•
If the current hunt group call is part of a conference call, it
cannot be monitored.
•
You can initiate a session on a Hunt group telephone with
Do Not Disturb or Auto Privacy are active.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
184 / Programming Hunt Groups
•
Using a headset automatically defaults Silent Monitor to
mute. This is the recommended way of using the Silent
Monitor feature.
•
Messages received by the supervisor during a silent
monitoring session, will not provide an indication on the
display.
•
Attempting to initiate any feature keys on the supervisor
set, while a session is active, will terminate the silent
monitoring session.
•
A priority call or ring again call will be indicated on the
display. The monitoring session will terminate if the call is
accepted.
•
If a line is assigned to both a ringing group and a hunt
group, calls coming in over this line cannot be monitored.
•
If a voice call coming into a supervisor telephone is
accepted, any active monitoring session will be released.
•
T7316 telephones used as supervisor may experience
problems using mute and unmute when joining or leaving
a silent monitor session.
MCDN constraints: The attendant cannot break-in to a call
which is being monitored. Trunk Anti-Tromboning (TAT)
will not be applied to a call that is currently being monitored.
If a call has already had TAT applied, the call cannot be
monitored.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using the Hospitality features
This section describes the Hospitality Services feature which
is used to administer room and alarm services in small to
medium-sized facilities such as hotels, motels, or hospitals.
There are three types of sets that make up this type of system:
Common set—this telephone can be found in the lobby,
office, or common area, and is not associated with a room.
This type of telephone is used for public access, and cannot
access the admin or room features.
Room set—this telephone resides in a specific room and can
be used by both guests and cleaning staff to set alarms or to
indicate room condition. Up to five DNs can be assigned to the
same room number, such as for fax lines, internet dial-up, etc.
Administration set—this telephone must be a two-line
display telephone, and is usually configured with a password
to allow secure administration of room occupancy and
condition services and alarm services.
Hospitality passwords
There are two passwords within the hospitality feature. One
provides secure access to the administration set, and one
provides secure access to a room condition setting from each
room set for housekeeping staff.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
186 / Using the Hospitality features
Desk pswd
Change this password frequently, to maintain security.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
display shows Password:.
3. Press
Terminals&Sets.
(CONFIG). The
(ADMIN). The display shows
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
5. Press ≠. Desk pswd: displays. (default:4677)
6. Press CHANGE. New pswd: displays
7. Enter a new password, then press OK.
Cond pswd
Change this password frequently, to maintain security.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
display shows Password:.
3. Press
Terminals&Sets.
(CONFIG). The
(ADMIN). The display shows
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
5. Press ≠. Desk pswd: displays
6. Press ‘. Cond pswd:None displays.
7. Press CHANGE. New pswd: displays
8. Enter a new password, then press OK.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using the Hospitality features / 187
Room/desk information
There are two aspects to programming room information.
•
First you must program individual DNs to a specific room
and set up the room occupancy filters, which determine
what types of calls can be made from a room set at various
states of occupancy.
Note: You can assign up to five DNs to the same room
number.
•
Then you need to administer the room occupancy and state
of the room.
Programming room information
Use this setting to assign set DNs to a specific room.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
display shows Password:.
3. Press
Terminals&Sets.
(CONFIG). The
(ADMIN). The display shows
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
5. Press ≠. Room/desk info displays.
6. Press ≠. Show set: displays.
7. Enter a room set number or press LIST and press
‘ until you find the DN of the set you want to
assign to a room.
8. Press ≠. Room #:None displays.
9. Press CHANGE and enter the room number, then press OK to
accept the change.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
188 / Using the Hospitality features
10. Press ‘. Adm pwd req’d:Y displays
11. Press CHANGE and choose Y or N, depending on your
security requirements.
Call restrns
Call restrictions can be set up by the system administrator.
Refer to the Modular ICS Installer Guide for details.
Service times
You can set the time when occupied rooms change from
Service done to Service required. This setting affects the
Room condition feature.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
display shows Password:.
3. Press
Terminals&Sets.
(CONFIG). The
(ADMIN). The display shows
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
5. At the Hospitality heading, press ≠ until
Service time displays.
6. Press ≠. Hour: 00 displays.
7. Press CHANGE and enter the hour (00 to 23).
If the number is less than 13, the display shows AM. Press
CHANGE to select PM, if required. Press OK to accept.
8. Press ‘. Minutes: 00 displays.
9. Press CHANGE and enter the minutes (00 to 59).
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using the Hospitality features / 189
Using the room/set programming
This section describes how the room occupancy and room
condition settings are used.
Setting dialing filters by room state
1. Press ²¡àá.
2. Enter the Desk admin password if you are prompted for a
password.
The set displays: Oc of rm#::
3. Enter the room number and press OK.
The set displays rrrrr:Vacant.
4. Press the CHANGE display key and select the required status
for the room set.
5. To program other rooms, press the FIND or NEXT display
key and return to step 3.
6. Press ¨ to exit.
Note: Setting the room state to Vacant cancels any outstanding
alarms.
Setting the room condition
You can use this feature on a room set or administration set to:
•
set the room state to service done ( Srvc done)
•
set the room state to Needs service (Needs srvc)
•
query the state of the room
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
190 / Using the Hospitality features
Using the room set:
¥¡àß
1. Press ²¡àß on a digital set
or ˚
on an analog set.
2. At the prompt, set the status of the room.
Note: You may be required to enter a Room condition
password.
Press
Press
Ú
Û
¨
to indicate Set to srv done.
to indicate Set to needs srv.
The set displays the selected prompt.
3. Press
to exit.
Using the admin set:
1. Press
²¡à¡
.
2. Enter the Desk admin password if you are prompted for a
password.
The set displays: Cd of rm#:
3. Enter the room number and press OK.
The set displays rrrrr:Vacant.
4. To update the condition, press CHANGE and select the
required status.
To query the condition of other rooms, press the FIND or
NEXT displays keys.
5. Press
¨
to exit.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using the Hospitality features / 191
Programming the alarm feature
If you want to allow the room sets to program wake-up alarms,
there are a couple of program settings that need to be entered.
1. Place the appropriate programming overlay on the set you
are using to do programming.
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
display shows Password:.
3. Press
Terminals&Sets.
(CONFIG). The
(ADMIN). The display shows
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
5. Press ≠. Room/desk info displays.
6. Press ‘ until Alarm displays.
7. Press ≠. Attn attempts:3 displays.
8. Press CHANGE until you find the number you want (1-5).
9. Press ‘. Retry intrvl:4 displays.
10. Press CHANGE until you find the number you want (2, 4, 6,
or 8).
11. Press ‘. Attn duration: 15 displays.
12. Press CHANGE until you find the number of seconds you
want (10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50).
13. Press ‘. Time format:12 hr displays.
14. Press CHANGE to choose either 12hr or 24hr.
15. Press ‘. Expired alarms displays.
16. Press ≠. Notify set:None displays.
17. Press CHANGE to enter a set DN to be notified.
18. Press ‘. Use tone: N displays.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
192 / Using the Hospitality features
¨
19. Press CHANGE to choose either Y (yes) or N (no).
20. Press
to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Using the Administration set to control alarms
Only a Hospitality Services set can use this alarm
administration feature. This feature is also associated with a
room number, and cannot be used on common sets.
Use this feature to:
•
query a current or last alarm time set for a room
•
assign an alarm time for any room
•
change an alarm time for any room
•
cancel an pending alarm for any room
To program the alarm, follow these steps:
1. Press ²¡àà.
2. Enter the Desk admin password if you are prompted for a
password.
The set displays: al of rm#:
3. Enter the room number.
4. Press VIEW. The set displays Alrm: 07:00am OFF:.
If the alarm time is correct, press the ON/OFF display key.
If you want to change the time, enter a new four-digit
alarm time.
If the clock uses a 24-hour format, enter an hour between
00 and 23, and minutes between 00 and 59. The set
displays: Alarm ON hh:mm
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using the Hospitality features / 193
If the clock uses a 12-hour format, enter the time, then
when the set displays: hh:mm AM or PM?, press AM or PM.
The set displays: Alarm ON hh:mm.
5. Press ¨ to exit.
Using the alarm
To set an alarm on a digital telephone:
1. Press ²¡àÞ. The displays shows Alrm:07:00
OFF
2. Do one of the following:
If the alarm is correct, press ON/OFF.The set displays:
Alrm:07:00am ON. Press DONE to exit.
If you need to change the alarm time, press CHG. The set
displays: Enter time:
3. To enter a new time, do one of the following:
If the clock uses a 24-hour format, enter an hour between
00 and 23, and minutes between 00 and 59. The set
displays: Alarm ON hh:mm
If the clock uses a 12-hour format, enter the time, then
when the set displays: hh:mm AM or PM?, press AM or PM.
The set displays: Alarm ON hh:mm.
To set an alarm on an analog set:
1. Press ˚
¥¡àÞ
. A tone sounds.
2. Enter a four-digit alarm time:
If the clock uses a 24-hour format, enter an hour between
00 and 23, and minutes between 00 and 59. A tone sounds.
¥
£
If the clock uses a 12-hour format, enter the time, then
press
to select am or
to select pm. A tone sounds.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
194 / Using the Hospitality features
To enter a new time, repeat the above steps and enter a new
time. This overwrites the existing entry.
Canceling an alarm
Canceling the alarm time for any set cancels the alarm time for
all the sets in the same room.
Digital set: Press ²£¡àÞ.
Analog set: Press ˚£¡àÞ.
Turning off an alarm
When the alarm rings, the user can release the ring by doing
one of the following, depending on the type of set in the room:
Digital set: Press any button except
³
³
.
Analog set: Lift and replace the handset.
acts like a snooze alarm and will temporarily disable the
alarm for a programmed period. Refer to Service times on page
188.
If the user is on a call when the alarm sounds, they can press
any button except ¨, which would release the call instead.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Telephone features
Installing Business Series Terminals
If you are connecting a Business Series Terminal for the first
time, refer to the following illustrations as a guide.
Installing the Business Series Terminal connections
Installing to a desk jack
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
196 / Telephone features
Mounting a Business Series Terminal on the wall
Installing without the angled base
Mounting a Business Series Terminal using the stand
Tighten screws for a secure fit.
Mount the stand as shown and
insert screw. Use the screw that
came with your keystation.
Connect cords to the telephone,
refer to cord connections
Mount the telephone onto the
screws and slide it down.
Connect line cord to
wall jack.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Telephone features / 197
Installing Norstar telephones
If you are connecting a Norstar telephone for the first time,
refer to the following illustrations as a guide.
Installing a Norstar telephone
Connect to
jack wired from
distribution block
Connect to
receiver
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
198 / Telephone features
Mounting a Norstar telephone on the wall
1
2
3
4
5
6
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Telephone features / 199
Naming a telephone or a line
You can assign names to identify external lines, target lines,
and each telephone. During a call, the name, if programmed, is
shown on the telephone display instead of the external line
number or internal telephone number of the caller. Step-bystep instructions for adding or changing the name of a
telephone or a line are in Changing the name of a telephone on
page 34.
Telephone names and line names can contain both letters and
numbers, but cannot be longer than seven characters. You
cannot use the # and * symbols.
Tip - You can give the same name to two or more telephones,
or to a telephone and a line in your system. To avoid confusion,
avoid such duplication. Use initials, abbreviations, or even
nicknames to give each telephone a unique name.
If automatic telephone relocation is turned on, the name and
internal number of a telephone are saved if the telephone is
moved within your system.
Moving telephones
You may be required by law to report any telephone moves
to your local telecommunications carrier or 911 service
provider. For further details, consult your local carrier, your
local 911 service provider, and/or your local
telecommunications service provider.
If automatic telephone relocation is enabled in programming
by your installer or customer service representative, you can
move your telephone from one Norstar jack to another without
losing any of its custom programming. If you want to replace
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
200 / Telephone features
a telephone and cancel the programming, ensure that the
relocation setting is off.
Stopping calls from ringing at your
telephone: Do Not Disturb (DND)
Stopping calls
Press
²¡Þ
to stop calls from ringing at your telephone.
Only priority calls ring at your telephone. A line button flashes
when you receive a call, but the call does not ring.
Refusing to answer a call
While you are on a call, you can refuse to answer a second call
(including a priority call).
Press
²¡Þ
while your telephone is ringing.
Canceling Do Not Disturb
Press
²£¡Þ
.
Displays
Allow calls
Your telephone receives calls normally.
Using Do Not Disturb
Once you turn Do Not Disturb on, calls are forwarded to the
prime telephone only if there is no other telephone on which
the line appears. If there is another telephone that shares the
same line, the call may be answered by that person. The
Delayed Ring Transfer feature transfers all unanswered calls
to the prime telephone after a specified time.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Telephone features / 201
Do Not Disturb prevents voice calls from alerting at your
telephone. Voice calls are presented as normal intercom calls.
Tip - Norstar and BST telephones that are members of a
Hunt Group can temporarily leave a Hunt Group by
activating this feature. Hunt Group calls arriving while a
telephone is in Do Not Disturb mode are routed to the next
member in the Hunt Group. For more information about Hunt
Groups, see Programming Hunt Groups on page 169.
Using Background Music
²¡ß
Use this feature to active the optional music feature. You will
hear whatever music source is attached to the Modular ICS.
Your installer or service representative makes this feature
available to all telephones in programming. You need to
supply a music source, such as a radio, and have it attached to
your ICS.
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license
may be required from the American Society of
Composers, Authors and Publishers or a similar
organization if radio or TV broadcasts are
transmitted through the Background Music feature
of this telecommunication system.
Nortel Networks hereby disclaims any liability
arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Turning Background Music off
²£¡ß
The music stops automatically if you make or answer a call, or
press
to turn it off.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
202 / Telephone features
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
ISDN PRI and BRI
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) technology
provides a fast, accurate and reliable means of sending and
receiving data, image text and voice information through the
telephone system.
By using Primary Rate Interface (PRI) or Basic Rate Interface
(BRI), your ISDN service allows for faster transmission
speeds and the addition of a variety of powerful business
applications, including remote LAN access,
videoconferencing, file transfer and Internet access.
Your installer configures ISDN services and terminal
equipment.
ISDN PRI
PRI is economical because separate analog trunks and data
circuits are not needed for Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Direct
Outward Dialing (DOD), and data transfer.
With PRI there is greater flexibility because B channels can be
dynamically reconfigured to accommodate changes in traffic
with the Call by Call feature. For more information, see Call
by Call service selection for PRI on page 206.
PRI offers fast information access because channel usage is
optimized to allow you the full benefit of available bandwidth
and real-time connectivity.
PRI lines are configured as DID lines. Incoming calls on a PRI
line can appear on a DID button or on an intercom button
depending on how your target lines are assigned to the
telephones. Outgoing calls are made using the intercom
buttons.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
204 / ISDN PRI and BRI
PRI lines can be accessed from all devices such as Norstar
telephones, Business Series Terminals (BST telephones),
ISDN sets, and wireless handsets.
ISDN PRI features
Selected ISDN network features can be used from a Norstar
telephone. Your central office switch (ISDN network)
determines which features are available to you.
Network Name Display for PRI
Your Norstar system displays the name of an incoming call
when it is available from the service provider. Name
information can be displayed on a Norstar or BST telephone,
but not on an ISDN terminal. If the Calling Party Name has the
status of private, it may be displayed as Private name. If the
Calling Party Name is unavailable, it may be displayed as
Unknown name.
Your Norstar system displays the name of the called party on
an outgoing call, when it is provided by your service provider.
The Business Name concatenates with the set name on an
outgoing call. This can only occur if the Business Name has
been programmed.
The available features include:
•
•
•
•
•
receiving Connected Name
receiving Calling Name
receiving Redirected Name
sending Connected Name
sending Calling Party Name
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
ISDN PRI and BRI / 205
Consult your customer service representative to determine
which of these features is compatible with your service
provider.
Name and number blocking for PRI
²¡Úá
When activated,
allows you to block the
outgoing name and/or number on a per-call basis. Name and
number blocking can be used with a Norstar or BST telephone,
but not with an ISDN terminal.
Consult your customer service representative to determine
whether or not this feature is compatible with your provider.
Emergency 911 Dialing
Modular ICS 6.1 with the ISDN PRI feature is capable of
transmitting the telephone number and internal extension
number of a calling station dialing 911 to the Public Switched
Telephone Network. State and local requirements for support
of Emergency 911 Dialing service by Customer Premises
Equipment vary. Consult your local telecommunications
service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws
and regulations.
If transmission of internal extension numbers is not required or
desired, then it is recommended that the System Coordinator
maintain a site map or location directory that allows
emergency personnel to rapidly locate a Norstar or BST
telephone, given its DID number. This list should be kept up
to date and readily available, and can be included with the
Programming Record.
Two-way DID
With PRI, the same lines can be used for receiving direct
inward dialing (DID) and for making direct outward dialing
(DOD) calls.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
206 / ISDN PRI and BRI
The dialing plan determines how calls are routed.
Consult your customer service representative to determine
whether or not this feature is compatible with your service
provider.
Call by Call service selection for PRI
PRI lines can be dynamically allocated to different service
types with the Call by Call feature. PRI lines do not have to be
pre-allocated to a given service type.
Call types that may be available, depending on your service
provider are:
Public
Public calls connect your telephone with a
Central Office (CO). DID and DOD calls are
supported.
Private
Private calls connect your telephone with a
private network. DID and DOD calls are
supported. A private dialing plan may be used.
Tie
Tie lines are private incoming and outgoing
lines that connect Private Branch Exchanges
(PBX) such as Norstar.
FX
Foreign Exchange calls connect your telephone
to a remote CO. It provides the equivalent of
local service at the distant exchange.
Outwats
Outwats is for outgoing calls. This allows you
to originate calls to telephones in a specific
geographical area called a zone or band.
Typically a flat monthly fee is charged for this
service.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
ISDN PRI and BRI / 207
Inwats
Inwats is a type of long distance service which
allows you to receive calls originating within
specified areas without a charge to the caller. A
toll-free number is assigned to allow for
reversed billing.
Consult your customer service representative to determine
whether or not this feature is compatible with your provider.
Dialing Plan and PRI
The Dialing Plan supports PRI connectivity to public and
private networks. The dialing plan is a collection of features
responsible for processing and routing incoming and outgoing
calls. All PRI calls must go through a dialing plan.
The Dialing Plan
•
•
•
•
allows incoming calls to be routed to telephones, based on
service type and digits received
allows Enbloc dialing by buffering user-dialed digits until
a complete DN has been dialed
provides the ability to map user-dialed digits to a service
type on a Call by Call basis
allows long distance carrier selection via user-dialed
Carrier Access Codes
Depending on the type of dialing plan chosen, you may also
need to specify a Private DN length so the system knows when
the user has completed dialing.
Refer to the Networking chapter in the Modular ICS 6.1
Installer Guide for more details about dialing plans. Consult
your customer service representative to determine how your
dialing plan is configured.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
208 / ISDN PRI and BRI
ISDN BRI
Modular ICS 6.1 supports a maximum of 30 ISDN sets on the
system.
The following ISDN services are supported:
•
•
•
•
•
•
incoming calls
outgoing calls
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLID)
sub-addressing
bearer capabilities
teleservices
The Call Forward All Calls feature can be used from ISDN
terminals connected to Modular ICS.
Note: Norstar and BST telephones can accept voice calls
only. Video and data calls do not alert at a Norstar or
BST telephone.
Although an ISDN S-loop or LT-loop can support up to eight
devices, the loop has a limit of two B-channels. If both Bchannels are in use, other devices on that loop cannot make or
receive calls until a B-channel is available, or until both
B-channels are available, in the case of a video terminal. Thus,
the number of terminals installed must take into account
whether you require dedicated access for the terminals on that
loop.
Note: System telephone features, other than Transfer and Call
Forward All Calls, are not available to ISDN terminals.
In addition, you cannot retrieve a parked call, or reach
a Direct-Dial set by using the Direct-Dial digit from an
ISDN terminal.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
ISDN PRI and BRI / 209
Line access from an ISDN terminal
ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys, as do
Norstar telephones and Business Series Terminals. To make
an outgoing call from an ISDN terminal, access an external
line by entering a line pool code or by using the ARS feature.
ISDN BRI features
Selected ISDN network features can be used from a Norstar or
BST telephone. Your central office switch (ISDN network)
determines which features are available to you.
Network Name Display for BRI
Your Norstar system displays the name of an incoming call
when it is available from the service provider. Name
information can be displayed on a Norstar or BST telephone,
but not on an ISDN terminal. If the Calling Party Name has the
status of private it may be displayed as Private name. If the
Calling Party Name is unavailable it may be displayed as
Unknown name.
Your Norstar system displays the name of the called party on
an outgoing call, when it is provided by your service provider.
As with PRI, your Norstar system sends the Business Name
concatenated with the set name on an outgoing call, but only if
a Business Name has been entered for the set.
The available features include:
•
•
•
receiving connected name
receiving calling name
receiving redirected name
•
•
sending connected name
sending calling party name
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
210 / ISDN PRI and BRI
Consult your customer service representative to determine
whether or not this feature is compatible with your service
provider.
Name and number blocking for BRI
²¡Úá
When activated,
allows you to block the
outgoing name and/or number on a per-call basis. Name and
number blocking can be used with a Norstar set but not with
an ISDN terminal.
Consult your customer service representative to determine
whether or not this feature is compatible with your service
provider.
Service provider features
Consult your customer service representative to determine if
the new ISDN features are supported with your service
provider.
Call Forward
Call Forward allows you to forward your calls to an external
telephone number.
1. Select an ISDN line by selecting a line button, a line pool,
or the handsfree button, or by lifting the handset (if an
ISDN line is your prime line).
2. Consult your service provider for the appropriate feature
code to enter on your dialpad. Listen for three tones
followed by dial tone.
3. Enter the internal number of the telephone to which you
want your calls forwarded. If the call is answered, stay on
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
ISDN PRI and BRI / 211
the line for at least five seconds to activate the Call
Forward feature.
Canceling Call Forward
1. Select an ISDN line by selecting a line button, a line pool,
or the handsfree button, or by lifting the handset (if an
ISDN line is your prime line).
2. Consult your service provider for the appropriate feature
code to enter on your dialpad. Listen for a series of tones.
3. Press
¨
.
Calling the number your calls are forwarded to
1. Select an ISDN line by selecting a line button, a line pool,
or the handsfree button, or by lifting the handset (if an
ISDN line is your prime line).
2. Consult your service provider for the appropriate feature
code to enter on your dialpad.
Automatic Call Back
If you call a number and it is busy, enter the appropriate
feature code designated by your service provider to receive a
distinctive ring at your set when the line becomes available for
calls.
Automatic Recall
Automatic Recall allows you to automatically dial the number
of the last call you received. You may not see the number on
the display if the information is not available from your service
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
212 / ISDN PRI and BRI
provider, or if you do not have Caller ID as part of your ISDN
service.
Consult your service provider for the appropriate feature code
to enter on your dialpad.
MCID (profile 2)
²¡áà
The MCID feature allows you to enter
to have
call information recorded on the central office system for an
incoming call on a specific line (ETSI EURO ISDN lines,
only).
The user must invoke the feature code either during the active
call or within 30 seconds (time varies on different networks)
after the caller hangs up, but before the user hangs up.
MCID prompts
Call traced
The MCID request was accepted by the
network.
No response
No response to the MCID request.
Not incoming
MCID can only be invoked on received
calls.
Not available
The caller information is not available. The
CO is not able to log the information or it is
not an ETSI BRI/PRI type of call.
Not subscribed
MCID feature is not subscribed to.
Invalid state
MCID is not allowed in the current state of
the call.
Not allowed
Invalid interaction with another
supplementary service.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
ISDN PRI and BRI / 213
Network Call Diversion (profile 2)
This feature is a network function that allows forwarding and
redirection of calls outside the Norstar network when using an
ETSI ISDN line. Functionality is similar to that of External
Call Forward (ECF). NCD redirects calls using the same line
on which they arrive. Call forward is efficient since there is no
need for additional outside lines.
Overlap dialing (profile 2)
This feature allows a break in the dialing sequence when
dialing on ETSI PRI lines that require overlap dialing.
ISDN BRI terminals
Your Modular ICS allows connection of eight Basic Rate
Access loops (four 2B+D channels) that can be used for fully
digital connections to ISDN networks and devices. Loops are
connections between the ICS and devices or between the ICS
and the network.
Each loop provides two separate B-channels that can be used
to make two simultaneous voice or data calls, or one data call
and one voice call.
ISDN applications for BRI and PRI
ISDN terminal equipment delivers a wide range of powerful
business applications:
Videoconferencing and video telephony
Video conferencing offers instant visual and audio contact
between distant parties using either studio-based or desktop
ISDN terminals.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
214 / ISDN PRI and BRI
Desktop conferencing
ISDN allows computer users in distant locations to share and
edit any image, data or text file on their own computer screens
while they discuss the information.
File transfer
The ISDN network allows you to transfer files containing data,
text, images, data, or audio clips, faster and cheaper than with
a conventional modem.
Telecommuting
Convenient retrieval, processing and storage of files is
possible for the employee working at home by using ISDN
lines to give high-speed access to information resources at the
office.
Group 4 fax
ISDN fax applications save money by increasing both
transmission speed and the quality of resolution.
Remote LAN access
ISDN provides an affordable and fast means for employees at
remote sites (at home or branch offices) to access local area
networks (LANs).
Leased line backup
Essential backup for leased lines can be provided using ISDN
as required, rather than duplicating costly permanent leased
lines.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
ISDN PRI and BRI / 215
LAN to LAN bridging
Local area network (LAN) bridge/routers allow flexible
interconnection between LANs using ISDN, with charges
incurred only when information is actually transmitted.
Internet and database access
The fast call set up and high bandwidth of ISDN are ideal for
accessing information services such as the Internet and
databases.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
216 / ISDN PRI and BRI
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using System features
Using alternate or scheduled services
There are three types of Services to make your Norstar system
handle calls differently on different days and at different times
of the day: Ringing service, Restriction service and Routing
service.
Each of the three services, and the six schedules available to
each service, are customized for you by your installer or
customer service representative. They program which
telephone is used to turn Services on and off, and display what
Services are in use. This is called the control telephone.
Preventing certain calls from being made
Restriction service prevents a user from making certain kinds
of calls from a telephone or from lines that are available at the
telephone. The restrictions are programmed by your installer
or customer service representative. For example, you might
want to restrict long distance dialing between certain hours of
the day.
Making additional telephones ring
Ringing service makes additional telephones ring for
incoming calls on external lines. For example, all incoming
external calls can ring at a security telephone during the night.
Or calls to one attendant can ring at another telephone during
lunch. This service does not suppress your normal ringing
assignment.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
218 / Using System features
Changing the lines used by outgoing calls
Routing service allows you to assign alternate routes to calls
during different schedules. In this way you can take advantage
of lower costs available on particular routes on certain days
and at certain times. Both the regular and alternate routes are
programmed by your installer or customer service
representative.
Note: Your system administrator can also assign alternate
routes for destination codes that are defined to run on a
schedule. In this case, alternate routes are offered only in the
case where the original route is not available. Refer to the
section on least-cost routing in the Modular ICS Installer
Guide.
Turning Services on and off
The master control for how different services and their
schedules are used by your system is in programming. There
are three settings: Manual, Automatic and Off.
•
Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any
time from a control telephone using a feature code.
•
Automatic allows you to use the preassigned stop and start
time for a service. You are able to start and stop the service
by entering the appropriate feature code at a control
telephone. If you select this setting, you use the start and
stop times programmed by your installer or customer
service representative.
•
Off prevents the service from being activated.
In the case of restriction settings and routing, this means
that the Normal schedule will be in effect.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using System features / 219
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ‘ twice. Services displays
4. Press ≠. Ringing Service displays.
5. Press ‘ until you see the service you want to
program.
6. Press ≠ and ‘ until you see the
schedule you want to program.
7. Press ≠ and use CHANGE to select the setting that
works best for your office: Off, Manual or Automatic.
Each schedule can have its own configuration of a Service
which works independently of automatic start and stop times.
For example, there may be a version of Restriction service
called Night Schedule that prevents anyone from making long
distance calls. But calling it Night Schedule does not mean it
can only be used with a schedule. You can turn the Night
Schedule for Restriction Service on or off, as needed, any time
of the day or night. If you decide to run a service on a schedule,
the system uses the start and stop times used for that schedule.
An example of how to turn on a Service manually
You may have Ringing service, as your night service, set up to
run according to the Night Schedule. You may decide you
want that ringing arrangement to come into effect only when it
is turned on and off manually.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
220 / Using System features
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ‘ twice. Services displays
4. Press ≠. Ringing Service displays.
5. Press ≠. The display reads Sched:Nightˆ.
6. Use CHANGE to set the Service to Manual.
Night Schedule for Ringing Service no longer follows the
schedule but can be turned on and off by using the feature code
and selecting Night Ringing. See Turning Services on and off
on page 220.
Turning Services on and off
The master control for services is in programming. See
Turning Services on and off on page 218. Day-to-day use of
Services is controlled using the following feature codes.
²¡àÚ
²£¡àÚ
²¡àÛ
²£¡àÛ
²¡àÜ
²£¡àÜ
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
Turns on Ringing service. When used at the
direct-dial telephone, it activates the
alternate direct-dial telephone (extra-dial
telephone).
Turns off Ringing service.
Turns on Restriction service.
Turns off Restriction service.
Turns on Routing service.
Turns off Routing service.
P0603535 02
Using System features / 221
To turn a Service on:
1. Enter the appropriate feature code from a control
telephone.
2. For Restriction and Routing service you have to enter the
System Coordinator or Basic password.
3. Press NEXT to move through the schedules until the display
shows the version of the service you want to be turned on.
4. Press OK to select the setting, or press QUIT to exit the
feature without making any changes.
To turn a Service off:
1. Enter the appropriate feature code from a control
telephone.
2. For Restriction and Routing service you have to enter the
System Coordinator or Basic password.
Do not confuse activating Normal service with
canceling a Service.
Setting a Service to Normal is not the same as
canceling a Service using a feature code. If you set
the Service to Normal, the normal version of a
Service overrides any automatic schedule and
remains in effect until you manually cancel it. If you
cancel the Service, you return to the automatic
schedule.
Viewing the active Services on a two-line display
When a Service is active, the control telephone display reads
Services ON.
1. Press LIST. The display shows the first active Service and
the schedule that is in use.
2. If there are several active Services, press NEXT to see them
all.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
222 / Using System features
3. Press EXIT to exit the feature.
Viewing the active Services on a one-line display
²¡àâ
£
¨
1. Press
Service.
2. Press
3. Press
. The display shows the first active
to move through the active schedule.
to exit.
Displays
<Sched> Restr'n
EXIT
NEXT
<Sched> Restr'n
QUIT
OK
NEXT
<Sched> Ringing
EXIT
NEXT
<Sched> Ringing
QUIT
OK
NEXT
<Sched> Routing
EXIT
NEXT
<Sched> Routing
QUIT
OK
NEXT
<Sched> until *
QUIT
OK
NEXT
£
¨
You are viewing the active Services. Press
or NEXT to see the other active
Services. Press
or EXIT to quit.
£
The name of the current Restriction
service schedule displays. Press
or
NEXT to see the other Ringing service
schedules. Press
or OK to select the
desired schedule.
³
£
You are viewing the active Services. Press
or NEXT to see the other active
Services. Press
or EXIT to quit.
¨
£
The name of the current Ringing service
schedule displays. Press
or NEXT to see
the other Ringing service schedules. Press
or OK to select the desired schedule.
³
£
You are viewing the active Services. Press
or NEXT to see the other active
Services. Press
or EXIT to quit.
¨
£
The name of the current Routing service
schedule displays. Press
or NEXT to see
the other Routing service schedules. Press
or OK to select the desired schedule.
³
Press
³
¨
or OK to select this schedule,
£ or NEXT to see the next available
schedule, or
or QUIT to exit. If you
select this schedule, it is in effect until the
next automatic schedule takes effect.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using System features / 223
You have entered the Show Services
feature code and there is no active
Service.
No services ON
Services
ON
LIST
¥
There is a Service active in your system.
Press
or LIST to view the active
Services.
For other displays, see Common feature displays on page 257.
Services that have been turned on automatically are indicated
by an asterisk (*) before the name on the display. You can
neither manually activate nor cancel automatically-scheduled
services, although you can override them by manually turning
on another schedule.
The control telephone can override Services that are turned on
and off according to a schedule at any time by entering a
Services feature code, and then selecting a different schedule.
This override remains in effect until it is canceled. If you select
a schedule with an asterisk (*), the next automatic service
schedule comes into effect at the programmed time.
Direct-dial calls to a direct-dial telephone ring at the extra-dial
telephone only when you enter the Ringing service feature
code (
) at that direct-dial telephone. Note that
only the extra-dial telephone is activated, not the actual
Ringing service. This is the case unless that direct-dial
telephone is a control telephone. The extra-dial telephone is
designated by your installer or customer service
representative.
²¡àÚ
Tip - Norstar provides six service schedules named Night,
Lunch, Evening, Sched 4, Sched 5, and Sched 6. Your installer
or customer service representative can change these names to
suit your business.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
224 / Using System features
Using passwords
Your passwords prevent unauthorized or unintentional
changes to your Norstar system. To keep your telephone
service secure, distribute the password only to selected
personnel or make use of the basic password described below.
Record your password in a secure place and change it
periodically.
If you forget the administration or basic passwords, you
cannot do any programming. Call your customer service
representative to assign a new password.
The password is a one to six-digit number. It is advised to
make your password at least six digits long for security
reasons. If you press CHANGE but do not enter a new password,
the existing password is erased. Anyone can then access
programming without a password.
ÛÜßÝß ë÷éö
The default System Coordinator password is
which is the same as
.
,
One password cannot be a subset of another one. For example,
you cannot have 123 and 12345.
Using a Basic password
In addition to a System Coordinator password, there is a Basic
password. This allows you to delegate some of the duties of
being a system coordinator to someone else without allowing
access to sensitive programming.
ÛÛàÝÛ
The default Basic password is
.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
õêé‚
or
P0603535 02
Using System features / 225
You can enter the Basic password after the following feature
codes:
•
•
²¥¥èêäå
²¥¥æé÷ä
to access User Preferences
to change the system time and
date
Because the Basic password can be used to change the time,
you should give it out with care and change it when necessary,
for example, when an employee leaves the company. If
restrictions, routing or other services operate on a schedule,
changing the time can allow someone to bypass the
programming.
Registration password
The Registration password is used to control the registration of
Companion portables to the Norstar system. See the Modular
ICS Companion System Coordinator Guide for more
information.
Changing passwords
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ‘ four times. Passwords displays.
4. Press ≠. Call Log pswds displays.
5. Press ‘ until you see Progrming pswds ˆ.
6. Press ≠. Sys Admin: displays.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
226 / Using System features
7. Press ‘ until you see the name of the password
you want to change.
8. Use ≠, CHANGE and the dialpad to enter the new
password. Press OK to accept the new password.
You cannot erase or eliminate the ability to program
passwords.
Clearing a Call Log password
If an individual has forgotten their Call Log password, you can
clear it in programming. The individual can then enter a new
password from his or her telephone.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ‘ four times. Passwords displays.
4. Press ≠. Call Log pswds displays.
5. Press ≠ and enter the internal telephone number
of the telephone where you want to clear the Call Log
password.
6. Press ≠, then press CLR to clear the password
after the Log pswd: prompt.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using System features / 227
Hospitality passwords
There are two passwords within the Hospitality feature. One
provides secure access to the administration set for
programming the service, and one provides secure access to a
room condition setting from each room set for housekeeping
staff.
Desk pswd
Change this administration password frequently, to maintain
security.
At Hospitality:
1. Press ≠. Desk pswd: displays. (default is 4667)
2. Press CHANGE. New pswd: displays
3. Enter a new password, then press OK.
Cond pswd
Change this password frequently, to maintain security.
At Hospitality:
1. Press ≠. Desk pswd: displays.
2. Press ‘. Cond pswd:None displays.
3. Press CHANGE. New pswd: displays
4. Enter a new password, then press OK.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
228 / Using System features
Silent Monitor password
Users must enter a password when they use
to monitor Hunt group calls.
²¥ÞÞâ
It is advisable to change this password frequently.
At SM Passwd (default: 745368 (SILENT)):
1. Press CHANGE.
New pswd: displays
2. Use the keypad to enter a new password.
3. Press OK.
Using special telephones
Direct-dial
You can reach the direct-dial telephone by dialing a single
digit. The direct-dial telephone is usually in a central location,
such as at the desk of an administrative assistant or attendant.
You can have up to five direct-dial telephones for your Norstar
system. It is usually the prime telephone or the central
answering position (CAP).
The direct-dial telephone can send up to 30 messages and can
invoke Services to activate the extra-dial telephone.
You cannot forward calls to a direct-dial telephone that is
outside your Norstar system. See Making changes to Call
Forward No Answer on page 37.
Note: ISDN terminals cannot use the Direct-Dial digit to
reach a Direct-Dial set.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using System features / 229
Changing the direct-dial telephone assignments
Your installer or customer service representative sets up the
direct-dial telephone.
You can change which direct-dial telephone a telephone is
assigned to, or assign it no direct-dial telephone.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ at Terminals&Sets.
4. Enter the internal number of the telephone you want to
program and press ≠. The display reads
Capabilities.
5. Press ≠.
6. Press ‘ until the display reads D-Dial.
7. Press CHANGE to select Set1, Set2, Set3, Set4, Set5 or
None.
Any number of telephones can be assigned to call the
direct-dial telephone.
Tip - The digit you dial in order to get the direct-dial
telephone to ring can be programmed by your installer or
customer service representative.
The Norstar system cannot verify that the number you assign as
an external direct-dial telephone is valid. Check the number
before assigning it as a direct-dial telephone, and call the
direct-dial telephone after you’ve assigned it in order to test it.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
230 / Using System features
Hotline
A hotline telephone calls a preset internal or external
telephone number when you pick up the receiver (or press the
handsfree button).
Tip - Label the telephone to inform anyone using it that
Hotline is active.
Bypassing a Hotline
Press a line button, or use the Pre-Dial or the Automatic Dial
feature before you pick up the receiver or press the handsfree
button on a hotline telephone. See the Telephone Feature Card
or see Changing how you dial your calls on page 82.
Making a telephone a hotline telephone
You can set up a telephone as a hotline.
Tip - A Hunt Group set DN can be specified as a Hotline
telephone. For more information about Hunt Groups, see
Programming Hunt Groups on page 169.
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ at Terminals&Sets.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using System features / 231
4. Enter the internal number of the telephone you want to
program.
5. Press ≠. The display reads Capabilities.
6. Press ≠.
7. Press ‘ until the display reads Hotline.
8. Press CHANGE to select the type of call the hotline makes:
None, Intrnl, or Extrnl.
• Internl assigns an internal number.
• External assigns an external number.
If you select an external number, you can select the line on
which the call is made:
• the prime line
• an external line
• a line in a line pool, and a line pool access code
For this type of line, you must specify the line pool
access code.
• a line selected by the routing table
For this type of line, the number dialed is treated as a
destination code and is routed according to the routing
tables.
A prime line, line pool access codes, and access to a line pool
can be programmed by your installer or customer service
representative.
Control telephone
The control telephone allows you to place the telephones and
external lines for which it has responsibility into and out of
service schedules. See Using alternate or scheduled services
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
232 / Using System features
on page 217. Settings for this telephone can be copied from
one control telephone to another.
SM Supervisor
A telephone designated as an SM Supervisor allows you to
monitor Hunt group calls without or without a conference tone
indicator to the other two parties. See Using Silent Monitor on
page 180.
Using Set lock
Set lock limits the ways in which you can customize your
telephone. There are three levels of Set Lock: Full, Partial,
and None. None allows you to access all features on your
telephone.
Partial prevents:
• programming autodial
buttons
• programming user speed dial
numbers
• programming feature buttons
• moving line buttons
• changing the display
language
• changing dialing modes
(Automatic Dial, Pre-Dial,
and Standard Dial)
• using Voice Call Deny
• saving a number with Saved
Number Redial
Full, in addition to the restrictions outlined for Partial lock,
prevents:
•
•
•
•
changing Background Music
changing Privacy
changing Do Not Disturb
using Ring Again
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
•
•
•
•
using Call Forward all calls
using Send Message
using Trunk Answer
activating Services
P0603535 02
Using System features / 233
Changing Set Lock programming for a telephone
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
.
2. Press
password).
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ at Terminals&Sets and enter the
internal number of the telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠.
5. Press ‘ until the display reads Restrictions.
6. Press ≠ twice.
7. Press ‘ until the display reads Set lock.
8. Use CHANGE to select one of the three options: None,
Partial and Full.
Using an auxiliary ringer
An auxiliary ringer is a separate device that has to be
connected to Norstar. Refer to the section on installing
optional equipment in the Modular ICS 6.1 Installer Guide.
Turning the auxiliary ringer for a telephone on or off
You need the programming template found at the front of this
guide. See Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more
information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
P0603535 02
.
(the default System Coordinator
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
234 / Using System features
3. Press ≠ at Terminals&Sets.
4. Enter the internal number of the telephone you want to
program and press ≠. The display reads
Capabilities.
5. Press ≠.
6. Press ‘ until the display reads Aux. ringer.
7. Use CHANGE to select Y (Yes) or N (No).
Your installer or customer service representative can program
the auxiliary ringer to start ringing for incoming lines as part
of Ringing Service.
Using Host System dialing signals
You can access host systems, such as private branch
exchanges (PBX) from Norstar by using host system signaling
features (known as end-to-end signaling). These features
either send a special signal to the host system or allow you to
program delays required by host systems in external autodial
or speed dial sequences.
Link
²àÚ
If your Norstar system is connected to a private branch
exchange (PBX), you can use a Link signal to access special
features. On some telephones, Link is called FLASH.
The Link signal can be included as part of a longer stored
sequence on an external autodial button or in a speed dial code.
The Link symbol (¤) uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing
sequence.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using System features / 235
Preventing a telephone from using Link
Link can be restricted at individual telephones. You need the
programming template found at the front of this guide. See
Getting started with Norstar on page 13 for more information.
1. Press
²¥¥ÛßßÜÝÝ
ÛÜßÝß
2. Press
password).
.
(the default System Coordinator
3. Press ≠ and enter the internal number of the
telephone you want to program.
4. Press ≠. Capabilities displays.
5. Press ‘ three times. The display reads
Restrictions.
6. Press ≠ twice.
7. Press ‘ three times. The display reads Allow
link:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
Tip - If your Norstar system is connected to a private branch
exchange (PBX), program Link onto a memory button for onetouch access.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
236 / Using System features
Pause
²à¡
The Pause feature enters a 1.5-second delay in a dialing
sequence on an external line. This is often required for
signaling remote devices, such as answering machines, or
when reaching through to PBX features or host systems.
You can program more than one pause in an external autodial
or speed dial sequence.
The Pause symbol (›) uses one of the 24 spaces in a dialing
sequence.
For pulse dialing,
dialing sequence.
¥
inserts a 1.5-second pause into the
Long Tones
The Long Tones feature allows you to control the length of a
tone so that you can signal devices such as fax or answering
machines which require tones longer than the standard 120
milliseconds.
1. While on a call, press
²¡â¡
.
2. Press the dialpad buttons to produce the appropriate tones.
Each tone sounds for as long as you hold down the button.
Long tones can be used on any call except a conference call.
You can use internal lines of the Norstar system to activate a
device connected to an analog terminal adapter (ATA) in
another area of your office, or external lines to access devices
outside the Norstar system.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using System features / 237
Displays
Long Tones:
Programmed Release
¨
²
At the appropriate time, press any
dialpad button. Hold each button down
for as long as necessary. Press
or
to cancel Long Tones.
³
²¥¡á
The Programmed Release feature performs same function as
in a programmed dialing sequence. When the system
encounters Programmed Release in a dialing sequence, it stops
dialing and hangs up the call.
The Programmed Release symbol (fi) takes up two of the 24
spaces in a programmed dialing sequence.
The system ignores any digits or commands that follow a
Programmed Release in a programmed dialing sequence.
Run/Stop
²¥á
Run/Stop inserts a break point into a sequence of dialed
numbers or characters used for automatic dialing. This may be
necessary when you are connecting to a PBX or similar host
system.
For example, you can call a company with an automated
attendant that instructs you to dial the internal number you
need. You can program the company number, a Run/Stop,
then the internal number on one external autodial button. Press
the autodial button once to dial the company number. When
you hear the automated attendant, press the autodial button
again to dial the internal number.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
238 / Using System features
The Run/Stop symbol (fl) uses one of the 24 spaces in an
autodial or speed dial sequence.
You can include up to three Run/Stop commands in a dialing
string. The system ignores a fourth Run/Stop, and any digits or
commands that follow it in a programmed dialing sequence.
Wait for Dial Tone
²¡âÝ
Wait for Dial Tone causes a sequence of numbers to pause
until dial tone is present on the line before continuing to dial.
This is useful if you must dial a remote system and then wait
for dial tone from that system before dialing the rest of your
number.
The Wait for Dial Tone symbol (‡) uses two of the 24 spaces
in an autodial or speed dial sequence.
Displays
Invalid code
You have entered a code that can be
used only in a programmed autodial or
speed dial sequence, not on a call you
dial directly. Programmed Release and
Run/Stop are for use in programmed
dialing sequences only.
Using tone dialing for a call
£
If your external telephone lines use tone dialing, you can
temporarily switch to tone dialing by pressing
after
selecting the line. Tone dialing allows your Norstar telephone
communicate with devices and services that respond to tone
signals, such as automatic switchboards, and fax or answering
machines.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using System features / 239
Using your Norstar system from an
external location
You can use the lines and some of the features of a Norstar
system from outside the system. You can do this over the
public telephone network when you are away from the office,
or you can call from another system, over a private network.
An example of how remote access works is a sales
representative who spends a lot of time out of the office and
who needs to make long distance calls to the European office.
Your Norstar system has a leased line to Europe with reduced
transatlantic charges. You provide the sales representative
with a Class of Service (COS) password that gives access to
the transatlantic line. The sales representative can then
telephone into the Norstar system from a hotel, enter their
Class of Service password, and use the leased transatlantic line
to make calls.
Remote users can access Norstar lines, line pools, the page
feature, and remote administration, if that features is enabled
through Software Keys. The exact facilities available to you
through remote access vary, depending on how your installer
or customer service representative set up your system.
Tip - If the loop start line used for remote access is not
supervised, auto-answer does not function and the caller
hears ringing instead of a stuttered tone or the system dial
tone.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
240 / Using System features
Controlling access to your Norstar system
It is important to maintain the security of your Norstar system
by limiting access to authorized users and limiting those users
to the features they need.
Remote users can make long distance calls.
Remember, a remote user can make long distance
calls that are charged to your company and can
make page announcements in your office unless
you create the proper restrictions for external
access lines.
Direct inward system access (DISA)
Control access to your Norstar system with direct inward
system access (DISA). Access to your Norstar system from the
public telephone network should always be controlled with
DISA. If your installer or customer service representative
programs the line used for remote access to answer a call
automatically and wait for a DISA internal number, callers
hear a stuttered dial tone and must enter a Class of Service
password before they are allowed into the system.
Class of Service (COS)
To control the level of telephone service a remote user can
access, your installer can assign a remote filter and remote
package to the line used for remote access. The remote filter
restricts the numbers that can be dialed on the line, and the
remote package restricts the use of line pools and the page
feature. To change the restrictions for the line, the user can
enter their Class of Service (COS) password when the system
answers with DISA, or can dial the DISA internal number and
enter their Class of Service password.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using System features / 241
Maintaining security
To maintain the security of your system, the following
practices are recommended:
•
Warn anyone to whom you give the remote access number,
to keep it confidential.
•
Change Class of Service passwords often.
•
Warn anyone to whom you give a Class of Service
password, to remember it and not to write it down.
•
Remove the Class of Service password of anyone who
leaves your company.
Accessing Norstar remotely over the public network
1. Dial the Norstar system remote access number.
2. When you hear a stuttered dial tone, enter your COS
password.
3. Wait for the system dial tone.
To use the system remotely, you must use a telephone with
tone dialing to call the system.
Remote access is possible only on lines that your installer or
customer service representative programs to auto-answer
calls.
¥
¥
To use features on a remote Norstar system, press
followed
by the feature code. Even if you are calling from a Norstar
system, such as within a private network, press
instead of
.
²
In certain situations, you may experience lower volume levels
when using Norstar remotely.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
242 / Using System features
Tones
You may hear some of the following tones while accessing
Norstar remotely.
Tone
What it means
Busy tone
Dialed a busy line pool access code. You hear
system dial tone again after five seconds.
Norstar system dial
tone
You may use the Norstar remotely.
Fast busy tone
You have done one of the following
• Entered an incorrect COS password. Your
call is disconnected after five seconds.
• Taken too long while entering a COS
password. Your call is disconnected after
five seconds.
• Tried to use a line pool or feature not
permitted by your Class of Service. You
hear system dial tone again after five
seconds.
• Dialed a number in the Norstar system
which does not exist. Your call is
disconnected after five seconds.
Stuttered dial tone
Enter your COS password.
Using Class of Service (COS) passwords
Class of Service passwords permit controlled access to system
resources both by internal and remote users. When you enter a
Class of Service password at a telephone, the restriction filters
associated with your Class of Service password apply, rather
than the normal restriction filters. Similarly, when a remote
user enters a Class of Service password on an incoming autoanswer line, the restriction filters and remote package
associated with their Class of Service password apply, rather
than the normal restriction filters and remote package. COS
passwords are programmed by either your customer service
representative or installer.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Using System features / 243
Users should memorize their COS passwords instead of
writing them down. Typically, each user has a separate
password. Several users can share a password or one user can
have several passwords.
Individual COS passwords should be deleted when an
employee leaves the company. Group COS passwords should
be changed if one of the group members leaves the company.
Changing your Class of Service
You must enter a Class of Service password each time you
want to make a call that is normally restricted on a line or
telephone.
To change the restriction filters on a line or telephone:
1. Press
²ß¡
.
2. Enter your six-digit COS password.
COS passwords allow you to define individual passwords and
determine the restriction filters, and remote package
associated with each.
Tip - If you use your Norstar system from outside the office,
you may have to enter a Class of Service password to gain
access to the system. See Using your Norstar system from an
external location on page 239.
Displays
(Blank display) Enter your password. It is not
shown on the display.
Invalid Password
P0603535 02
You have entered a password that is not
programmed into your system.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
244 / Using System features
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
General System features
The following features are available for the entire Norstar
system.
Set profile
Set profile allows you to view but not change the programming
settings for each Norstar set. You can access Set Profile from
any M7310, M7324, or T7316/T7316E telephone, even while
you are on a call.
1. Press
²¥¥êäæ
.
2. Enter the internal number of the telephone whose
programming you want to review.
3. Use BACK, SHOW and NEXT to navigate through the settings.
Line profile
Line profile allows you to view but not change the
programming settings for each Norstar line. You can access
Line Profile from any M7310, M7324, or T7316/T7316E
telephone, even while you are on a call.
1. Press
²¥¥ñéöä
.
2. Enter the number of the line whose programming you want
to review.
3. Use BACK, SHOW and NEXT to navigate through the settings.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
246 / General System features
Pulse or tone dialing
If your external lines use pulse dialing, you can switch
temporarily to tone dialing to communicate with devices such
as answering machines, to access the features that PBX
systems may offer, or to use another Norstar system remotely.
£
Press
while on an active line. Once you hang up, your
telephone returns to pulse dialing.
Disconnect supervision
When Disconnect Supervision is assigned to a line, the Norstar
system monitors it to detect if an external caller hangs up. This
allows the system to release the line for other uses. Your
installer or customer service representative assigns disconnect
supervision.
Hunt Groups
Your Norstar system allows you to establish Hunt Groups.
Hunt Groups are a group of Norstar or BST telephones which
can be called by a single directory number. The Hunt Groups
feature ensures calls are easily routed to the appropriate
people.
You can also monitor hunt group calls using the Silent
Monitoring feature.
For more information about Hunt Groups and the Silent
Monitoring feature see Programming Hunt Groups on page
169.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
General System features / 247
Internal numbers
Each telephone in the Norstar system has its own internal
number. The length of internal numbers in your system can be
from three to seven digits. All numbers in your system are the
same length. Your installer or customer service representative
sets the length of internal numbers , called the DN length. The
default DN length is three.
²¥â
To find out your internal number, use the Button Inquiry
feature (
) on an intercom button. On the M7100 or
the T7100 sets, Button Inquiry shows your internal number,
followed by the function assigned to your single-memory
button.
Line assignment
Any of the lines in your system can be assigned to any of your
telephones. Your installer or customer service representative
assigns lines to telephones in Configuration programming,
under Terminals&Sets. Lines can be assigned to appear
only, appear and ring, or to ring only.
Usually, only the lines that are appropriate for a particular
person appear at their telephone. When a line is assigned to a
telephone, it is automatically given a line button on that
telephone, if a button is available. The M7100 and the T7100
sets do not have line buttons.
Calls on lines that ring, but which do not appear at a telephone,
are presented at an intercom button.
You may be able to answer a call on a line that does not appear
or ring at your telephone. To pick up such a call, use Call
Pickup, Call Park, or Trunk Answer.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
248 / General System features
A telephone may have buttons assigned for lines 001 to 003,
but have only lines 001 and 002 programmed to ring as well.
An incoming call on any of the three lines causes a line button
indicator to flash, and the telephone can be used to answer the
call. This is especially useful for people who monitor other
telephone lines, but want only their own lines to ring.
Target line
A target line is used to route a call directly to a particular
telephone or group of telephones. Target lines are used only
for incoming calls. A single incoming line may provide
connections to several different target lines. This allows each
person or department in the office to have their own number
without having a separate external line for each number.
Tip - The maximum number of target lines available in the
fully expanded XC system is 192.
Maxi system: lines 157-284
Expanded: lines 157-348
Privacy issue
You can set a target line to Private (default is
Public), however, such features as Call Pickup
can still answer these lines at remote telephones.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
General System features / 249
Line pools
A line pool allows each telephone access to external lines from
a group (or pool) of external lines. You can access such lines
by pressing an intercom button and entering a line pool access
code or a destination code, or by pressing a memory button
programmed with the line pool feature code and a line pool
access code.
Overflow call routing
If a call comes in for a target line that is busy, Norstar routes
the call to the prime telephone for that target line. If there is no
prime telephone assigned to the target line, or if a call cannot
be directed to a target line, the call goes to the prime telephone
for the external line used.
Overflow routing for incoming calls is used with the Routing
Service programmed by your installer. A Service must be
active for overflow routing to be in effect. Overflow routing is
not available in Normal service.
Tips - When you make a call and the programmed route is
busy, you hear the expensive route warning tone and see a
display indicating that an expensive route is being used. To
avoid using the normal, expensive route, release your call.
Because overflow routing directs calls using different line
pools, a call may be affected by different line filters when it is
handled by overflow routing.
If you are not sure how the filters are assigned, refer to the
Programming Record for a description of line filters and for
a list of line assignments.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
250 / General System features
M7100 and T7100 telephones
These telephones do not have line buttons, therefore, they
work differently from other Norstar telephones.
•
Where other telephones can require that you select a line
button to answer a call, on the these telephones you simply
pick up the receiver.
•
Where other telephones require you to select a line button
to take a call off hold, you press
on the these
telephones.
•
Also on these telephones, you can answer a second call by
pressing
. Your active call is put on hold and you are
connected to the waiting call. You can have no more than
two calls at a time.
³
³
There is no handsfree button on these telephones. When
applicable, special instructions are included with each feature
description.
Memory buttons
Memory buttons are the buttons with indicators on the M7208,
M7310, M7324, T7208, and T7316/T7316E telephones. The
M7310 also has dual buttons without indicators. There is a
single memory button, without an indicator, on the M7100 and
the T7100 telephones.
Memory buttons can be configured as answer, autodial, line,
and programmed feature buttons. Line, intercom and answer
buttons must have indicators, and are programmed by the
system administrator.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
General System features / 251
One-line display
The M7100, M7208, T7100 and T7208 telephones have a
one-line display.
Other telephones have a second line on the display which
shows the functions of the three buttons directly below it.
These indicators are known as display buttons.
Some display buttons, such as TRANSFER and ALL, are simply
shortcuts which are not available on a one-line display.
Other display buttons, such as OK and SHOW, perform essential
functions. For a one-line display telephone, use the following
buttons instead of these display buttons.
Substitutes for display buttons
Display button
OK
QUIT
ADD
SHOW
³
¨
Dialpad
button
¥
£
Display
button
CANCEL
VIEW
OVERRIDE
BKSP
Dialpad
button
£
£
£
Ã
All displays listed in this book are shown as they appear on the
two-line display.
Prime line
Your telephone can be programmed to select an internal or
external line or a line pool automatically whenever you lift the
receiver or press the handsfree button. This is your prime line.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
252 / General System features
Private lines
A private line is exclusive to a particular telephone. Calls that
are put on hold or left unanswered on a private line cannot be
picked up at any telephone except the prime telephone.
Volume bar
The volume bar controls the volume of the receiver, telephone
ringer, handsfree speaker, and headset. Press either end of the
volume bar
to adjust the volume.
Ã
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Troubleshooting
Using the alarm telephone
An alarm telephone displays Modular MICS system alarm
codes, should they occur. Alarm telephones are Norstar
telephones or Business Series Terminals with two-line
displays that are specifically assigned by the installer to
receive system alarm codes.
Reporting and recording alarm codes
If an alarm message appears on the alarm telephone display:
1. Record the alarm number.
2. Press TIME and record the time displayed.
3. Call your installer or customer service representative and
report the alarm code.
4. After speaking to your installer or customer service
representative, press CLEAR.
Displays
Alarm:
TIME
P0603535 02
61-4-2
CLEAR
Report this alarm and the time it occurred
to your installer or customer service
representative.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
254 / Troubleshooting
Testing the telephone
If you suspect something is wrong with a button, the speaker,
the displays, or some other part of the telephone hardware, you
can do a quick test to see which part of the telephone is broken.
²
Tip - Ensure that the function of a button matches its label by
pressing
function.
¥â
and then pressing the button to see its
You can end the telephone testing session anytime by pressing
or ², unless you are testing those buttons. The test
feature times-out after 30 minutes of no activity.
¨
Testing the telephone display
Use a display test if you suspect that one of the indicators on
the telephone is not working.
1. Press
²¡âÞ
³
2. Press TEST or
. The display reads Display test.
to go ahead with a display test.
3. Adjust the contrast for the telephone display so you are
able to see the test results clearly. Enter a number to
change the contrast or press DOWN and UP.
4. Press OK or
³
to go ahead with the test.
During the test, the display should be filled with solid, dark
blocks and all the indicators next to the buttons on the
telephone should be turned on. Any Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
or CAP modules or KIMs attached to the telephone should be
completely lit. You lose any information that was showing on
the BLF before the test started.
Pressing any button ends the test.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
Troubleshooting / 255
Testing the telephone buttons
1. Press
²¡âÞ £
³
, then
2. Press TEST or
or NEXT.
to go ahead with a button test.
3. Press the button to see its function. If the button you
pressed uses an indicator, it turns on when you test the
button.
¨
4. Pressing the
button puts Rls button on the display
briefly and returns you to the Button test display.
Testing the speaker in the telephone handset
The handset test is not available if you have a headset plugged
into the telephone.
²¡âÞ £
³
1. Press
, then
reads Handset test.
2. Press TEST or
or NEXT twice. The display
to go ahead with a handset test.
3. Pick up the handset and listen. Dial tone sounds through
the handset at maximum volume. The volume is reset to
maximum only while the test is going on.
4. Pressing any button or hanging up ends the test.
Testing the telephone headset
The headset test is not available to telephones that do not have
a headset jack or a headset plugged in.
²¡âÞ £
³
1. Press
, then
reads Headset test.
2. Press TEST or
or NEXT until the display
to go ahead with a headset test.
You should hear dial tone through the headset. The volume
is reset to a default level during the test.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
256 / Troubleshooting
3. Pressing any button ends the test.
Testing the telephone speaker
²¡âÞ £
³
1. Press
, then
reads Speaker test.
2. Press TEST or
or NEXT until the display
to go ahead with a speaker test.
A page tone sounds through the telephone speaker at the
maximum volume. The volume returns to its previous
setting when you end the test.
3. Pressing any button ends the test.
Testing the power supply to a telephone
²¡âÞ £
³
1. Press
, then
reads Power test.
2. Press TEST or
or NEXT until the display
to go ahead with a power supply test.
You should see all the indicators on the telephone go on and
hear ringing at maximum volume. When the test has ended, the
display should briefly show Power OK.
The test lasts for five seconds or until you press a button.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Common feature displays
You may see the following displays when you use a feature.
Access denied
Someone is already using programming,
or the feature you are trying to use is not
compatible with the configuration of the
telephone or line.
Denied in admin
You have tried to use a feature, but you
have not been given access to it in
administration programming.
Feature timeout
You have taken more than 15 seconds to
press a button in response to a display.
Inactive feature
You have entered a feature code that is
used by an application program that your
system does not have.
Invalid code
You have entered an invalid feature code.
Not available
You have tried to use a feature that is not
available in the present setup of your
Norstar system.
Set locked
You cannot use the feature you have
chosen because your telephone is locked.
See Using Set lock on page 232 .
1234567890123...
VIEW‚
OK
Press
or press VIEW‚ or ·VIEW to view
a number that is too long to fit on the
display. Press
or OK when you are
finished.
§
This indicates a long distance call. (May be
available with Call Display services.)
239>221
You are receiving an internal call from
telephone 239 forwarded by telephone 221
or you have an Answer button for
telephone 221 and an internal call from
239 is ringing on 221.
221
TRANSFER
P0603535 02
£
³
You are connected to an internal call.
Press TRANSFER to transfer the call.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
258 / Common feature displays
221 calling
You are receiving a call from telephone
221.
Call 221?
YES
NO
You have received a Ring Again offer for a
call to an internal telephone. Press the
flashing internal line button or YES to call
the number again. On M7100 or T7100
telephones, just lift the receiver.
Otherwise, press NO or wait 30 seconds for
the Ring Again offer to expire. For an
explanation of Ring Again, see Using Ring
Again on page 85 .
Camped:
The person to whom you camped the call
did not answer it. The call has come back
to you. Press the line button or CALLBACK to
reconnect to the call.
221
CALLBACK
Line001
TRANSFER
You are connected to an external call.
Press TRANSFER to transfer the call.
Line001>221
You are receiving an external call
forwarded from telephone 221 or you have
an answer button for telephone 221 and an
external call is ringing on that telephone.
Line001 transfer
The call on line 001 is being transferred to
you by someone else in your Norstar
system.
Line001 waiting
A camped call is waiting. Press the line
button or use Call Queuing to answer the
call. Press
if you have M7100 or
T7100 telephones.
No calls waiting
You tried to use Call Queuing but no call
was ringing at your telephone.
No line selected
There is no call ringing at your telephone.
If you have a flashing line button but your
telephone is not ringing, press the line
button to answer the call on that line.
Not in service
The telephone to which you directed a call
is not in service or is otherwise
unavailable. The call is returned to your
telephone.
Parked call
No one answered the call you parked. The
call has come back to you.
CALLBACK
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
³
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Common feature displays / 259
Pick up receiver
You have used the Call Queuing feature
without picking up the receiver. Auto
handsfree has not been assigned to your
telephone. You must use the receiver or
the button marked handsfree/mute to
answer a call.
Priority> 221
BLOCK
You are receiving a priority call. If you are
on another call, inform the person you are
speaking to that you are about to put the
call on hold. Press the flashing line
indicator of the priority call or wait until the
call connects automatically (eight
seconds). The priority call goes through
when you hear the next beep. Your active
call is placed on Exclusive Hold. It is
reconnected automatically when the
priority call ends, unless you transfer the
priority call, in which case you must press
the line button of your original call to
reconnect). Use DND (
°fi) or press
BLOCK to reject a priority call.
²
Release a call
You have no free line buttons on which to
receive a call. Release one of your current
calls and try again to answer the incoming
call.
Use line pool?
YES
NO
You have received a Ring Again offer for a
line pool. Press the flashing internal line
button or YES to use the line pool. On
M7100 and T7100 telephones, just lift the
receiver. Otherwise, press NO or wait 30
seconds for the Ring Again offer to expire.
Hold or release
You cannot program a feature button while
you are on a call.
Release calls
You have tried to use a feature while you
were on a call or had calls on hold. Release
the call or calls, before using the feature.
Line in use
The line is in use. Make the call using
normal methods or wait until the line is free.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
260 / Common feature displays
No button free
You have tried to make, receive or pick up
a call when no line button was available.
Some features require you to have a
button free. Releasing calls can free up line
buttons.
Make calls first
The feature you tried to use requires you to
be on an active call at your telephone. This
display appears when information about a
call has been cleared by a system reset.
No free lines
All the lines or line pools available to the
telephone are in use. This display appears
when you have tried to dial an external
number or use a feature that conflicts with
the lines, line pools or prime line used by
the telephone. This must be corrected by
your customer service representative or
installer.
No line selected
The telephone has been set up to dial an
external number on a prime line but the
telephone does not have a prime line. This
must be corrected by your customer
service representative or installer.
In use:221
You have tried to program redirection while
someone else is programming redirection.
Only one person can program line
redirection at a time.
Incoming only
The line you are trying to use for redirecting
calls is for incoming calls only. Choose an
outgoing line.
9__
QUIT
BKSP
OK
Ã
Continue entering digits. Press
or BKSP to delete incorrect digits. Press
or OK when you are finished.
³
Invalid number
You have entered an invalid line pool code
or an invalid destination code.
Line denied
You have selected a line that is private to
another telephone.
Restricted call
The destination you have chosen for line
redirection is restricted.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Glossary
A
access code: Different sequences of
characters used to gain access to these
Norstar features: Line pools, Call park,
external lines, Direct-Dial telephone,
Auto DN, and DISA DN. Destination
codes are also a form of access code.
alarm code: A number that appears
on the alarm telephone display,
informing you that the ICS has detected
a fault in the system.
alarm telephone: A telephone that is
designated to receive reports of Norstar
system problems. This function is
usually assigned to a prime telephone,
but this can be changed under Feature
settings in Sys prgrammng.
Answer button: A telephone button
with an indicator that is used to monitor
another telephone. The answer button
indicates incoming calls destined for the
other telephone. Someone working at a
telephone with answer buttons (an
attendant, for example) can receive all
ringing and visual indication of
incoming calls for other telephones, and
answer those calls when necessary.
One telephone can have up to four
Answer buttons. An Answer button is
automatically assigned to a telephone
when that telephone is assigned an
Answer DN.
Answer DN: The internal or directory
number (DN) of a telephone that is
monitored by an Answer button. You
can assign up to four Answer DNs to a
telephone under Line Access in
Terminals and Sets programming.
²¡ÚÞ
Autobumping:
A feature that determines what the
system does with new Call Log items
when your Call Log is full. When
P0603535 02
Autobumping is on, a new log entry
causes the oldest entry to be deleted. If
Autobumping is off, your Norstar
system does not log calls when your log
is full.
autodial button: A memory button
that, if programmed, provides one-touch
dialing of external or internal numbers.
²¥¡Ý
autolog options:
A feature that allows you to select the
type of calls that are stored in your Call
Log. You can choose to log calls that
were not answered by anyone within the
system, to log calls that were
unanswered at this telephone but which
were answered elsewhere in the system,
to log all calls answered and not
answered at this telephone, or to not
have calls automatically logged.
Automatic Dial: A feature that allows
you to dial without having to pick up the
receiver or select a line. You must have
a prime line to use Automatic Dial.
Automatic Dial is assigned under
Dialing options in Terminals&Sets
programming.
Automatic handsfree: A feature
which automatically activates handsfree
operation when you make or answer a
call. Automatic handsfree is assigned
under handsfree in Terminals&Sets
programming.
Automatic Hold: A feature that
automatically places an active call on
hold when you select another
line.Automatic Hold (Full AutoHold)
is assigned in Lines programming.
Automatic Privacy: See Privacy.
Automatic Daylight Savings
Time: A feature that switches the
system to standard or daylight savings
time at pre-programmed times. It is
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
262 / Glossary
turned on or off under Daylight time
in Sys prgrmmng.
Automatic Telephone
Relocation: A feature that allows a
telephone to retain personal and system
programming when the telephone is
plugged into a different Norstar modular
jack. Automatic Telephone
Relocation is enabled under Set
relocation in Sys prgrmmng.
auxiliary ringer: A separate external
telephone ringer or bell which can be
programmed to ring when a line or a
telephone rings. An auxiliary ringer may
be programmed to ring only when the
system is in a particular schedule.
Programming of an auxiliary ringer is
done in Services programming after
the feature has been enabled under
Capabilities in Terminals&Sets
programming.
B
Base station (XC 3.0 only): A
Companion component that is mounted
on walls and ceilings to provide a radio
link to an office or other area where
Companion portable telephones are
used. Each base station houses two
radios that allow portables to send and
receive calls through the ICS. (See also
Companion Wireless)
Background Music: A feature that
allows you to hear music from the
speaker of your Norstar telephone. It is
available only if a music source has
been attached to the ICS and the feature
has been enabled under Feature
settings in Sys prgrmmng.
Basic password: A one- to six-digit
password that prevents unauthorized
access to the most commonly-used
telephone settings. The Basic password
can be assigned and changed in
Passwords programming.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
Business series terminals These
terminals were developed to replace the
Norstar M-series terminals. Therefore,
their functionality closely parallels the
M-series terminals.
busy lamp field (BLF): A device
with a liquid crystal display (LCD)
panel of indicators that shows the status
of up to 24 telephones in the Norstar
system. The BLF attaches to the M7310
and T7316/T7316E telephones.
button caps: Interchangeable plastic
caps that fit over the buttons of Norstar
telephones. They are used to indicate the
features programmed onto each
programmable memory button. Button
caps are either pre-printed or have clear
windows that allow you to insert labels.
²¥â
Button Inquiry:
With this feature you can check the
function of each programmable button
on your system telephone.
C
²àà
Call Duration timer:
A feature that allows you to see how
long you spent on your last call, or how
long you have been on your present call.
²Ý
Call Forward:
A feature that forwards all the calls
arriving at your telephone to another
telephone in your Norstar system. To
have calls forwarded outside the system,
use Line Redirection.
Call Forward No Answer: A feature
that forwards all calls arriving at your
telephone to another designated
telephone in your Norstar system after a
specific number of rings. Call Forward
No Answer is assigned under
Capabilities in Terminals&Sets
programming.
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Glossary / 263
Call Forward On Busy: A feature
that forwards all calls at your telephone
to another designated telephone if your
telephone is busy. This feature is
assigned under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Call Forward Override: An
automatic system feature that allows
you to call someone and ask them to
stop forwarding their calls to you.
²¡ÚÚ
Call Information:
Call Information allows you to display
information about incoming calls. For
external calls, you can display the caller
name, telephone number and the line
name. For an internal call, you can
display the name of the caller and the
internal number. You can obtain
information about ringing, answered, or
held calls.
²¡ÚÛ
Call Log:
Enter your Call Log to view a record of
incoming calls. The log could contain
the following information for each call:
sequence number in the Call Log, name
and number of caller, long distance
indication, indication if the call was
answered, time and date of the call,
number of repeated calls from the same
source, and name of the line that the call
came in on. See Autobumping, Autolog
options, and Call Log for further
information.
²àÝ
Call Park:
With this feature you can place a call on
hold so that someone can retrieve it
from any other telephone in the Norstar
system by selecting an internal line and
entering a retrieval code.
The retrieval code appears on the
display of your telephone when you
park the call. You can park up to 25 calls
on the system at one time.
Call Park Callback: See Callback.
P0603535 02
Call Park prefix: The first digit of the
retrieval code of a parked call. This digit
cannot conflict with the first digit of any
existing DNs, Line Pool access codes,
the Direct-dial digit, or the external line
access code. The default Call Park
prefix digit is 1. It may be set to none, in
which case Call Park is disabled. Call
Park prefix is assigned under Access
codes in Sys prgrmmng.
²àß
Call Pickup Directed:
A feature that allows you to answer a
call ringing at any system telephone by
entering the internal number of that
telephone before taking the call. Call
Pickup Directed is enabled under
Feature settings in Sys prgrmmng.
Call Pickup Group: See Pickup
Group.
²¡âÚ
Call Queuing:
If you have several calls waiting at your
telephone, you can invoke the Call
Queuing feature to answer them in order
of priority. Priority is given to incoming
calls, followed by callback and camped
calls.
Callback: If you park, camp,
or transfer a call to another telephone
and it is not answered there, it will ring
again at your telephone. How long the
system will wait before Callback occurs
is set under Feature settings in Sys
prgrmmng.
²¡Û
Camp-on:
A feature that allows you to reroute a
call to a telephone even if all the lines on
that telephone are busy. To answer a
camped call, use Call Queuing or select
a line if the camped call appears on your
telephone. Priority is given to queued
calls. Note: Systems which use a
centralized voice mail system attached
to a Meridian 1, can provide this service
to all nodes of the network.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
264 / Glossary
Camp timeout: The length of a delay
before a camped call is returned to the
telephone that camped the call. The
length of delay is set under Feature
settings in Sys prgrmmng.
Central answering position
(CAP): An M7324 telephone and one
or more CAP modules or a T7316E
telephone and one or more KIMs that
are designated as a CAP under CAP
assign in Sys prgrmmng. The CAP
provides backup answering and can be
used to monitor the telephones within a
Norstar system. Buttons can also be
programmed under Button
programming, in this configuration.
Class of Service (COS): The set of
Norstar features and lines available to
the user for a call. The Class of Service
for a call is determined by the restriction
filters and remote access packages
assigned to the telephone in Lines
programming. The Class of Service for
a call can be changed by entering a sixdigit Class of Service password.
(Internal users cannot change their
access to features with a COS password,
only their restriction filters.) Class of
Service and Class of Service
passwords are assigned in Passwords
programming. See Remote Access.
²ß¡
Class of Service password:
A six-digit code that allows you to
switch from your current Class of
Service to one that allows you to dial
numbers prohibited by your current
Class of Service.
Companion Wireless: The name for
Nortel Networks communication
systems which use radio technology to
transmit and receive signals between its
components and the Norstar system.
Companion Wireless provides mobility
in the workplace. Calls that used to ring
just at your Norstar set can also appear
and ring at your portable.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
Companion portable telephone:
Hand-held wireless sets which allow
complete mobility within the reach of
Companion base stations or an external
antenna. Portables offer many, but not
all, Norstar features and share much of
the same programming as wired desk
sets.
²Ü
Conference:
A feature allows you to establish a
three-person call at your Norstar
telephone.
²¥à
contrast adjustment:
Allows you to set the contrast level of
your telephone display.
control telephone: A control
telephone can place the lines for which
it has responsibility in or out of a
Service Mode.
The direct-dial telephone is a control
telephone for directing calls to the extra
direct-dial telephone. A telephone is
made a control telephone and has lines
assigned to it in Services programming.
Coordinated Dialing Plan: (CDP)
This dialing plan uses a steering code to
identify each node in a private network.
This one-digit code becomes part of the
set DN number rather than a separate
code. In this way, system A might have
codes in range 2100 to 2999, whereas
system B might have codes in range
3100 to 3999.
COS: See Class of Service.
cursor: A short horizontal line that
appears on the system telephone display
to indicate that characters can be entered
using the dialpad.
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Glossary / 265
D
data terminal: A device, such as a
modem, that can be used to transfer data
instead of sound over a telephone
network. You cannot use Norstar
programming to set up such devices.
See the documentation that
accompanies the device.
date: See Show Time or Time and
Date.
defaults: The settings for all Norstar
features when the system is first
installed. Settings are changed from
their defaults in programming. In this
manual, default settings are shown in
bold text.
Delayed Ring Transfer (DRT) to
prime: After a specified number of
rings, this feature transfers an
unanswered call on an external line, to
the prime telephone associated with that
line. This feature is activated under
Feature settings in Sys prgrmmng.
destination code: A two- to sevendigit number that the system interprets
and then translates into the digits that
you want dialed out. Both the code and
its associated dialed digits are assigned
under Routing service in Services
programming.
dialing restriction: See Restriction
filter.
²¥¡Û
dialing modes:
This feature allows you to set the dialing
mode of your telephone. Norstar
supports three dialing modes:
Automatic Dial, Pre-Dial, and Standard
Dial. All three modes support on-hook
dialing, meaning you can dial a call
without picking up the receiver. The
special features of the Automatic and
Pre-Dial modes are available only when
you dial on-hook.
P0603535 02
Direct-dial: A feature that allows you
to dial a designated telephone in your
Norstar system with a single digit, such
as the main receptionist. As many as
five direct dial sets can be established.
Each telephone in the system is assigned
to one direct-dial telephone. There is a
single, system wide digit for calling the
assigned direct-dial telephone of any
telephone. Direct-dial telephones are
established in System programming.
Telephones are assigned to a direct-dial
telephone under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Direct-dial #: A digit used systemwide to call the Direct-dial telephone.
The digit is assigned under Access
codes in Sys prgrmmng.
Direct-dial number: The digit used
to call the direct-dial telephone.
Direct inward system access
(DISA): The feature that allows remote
users to dial directly into the Norstar
system and use Norstar features. Callers
will hear stuttered dial tone and will be
required to enter a Class of Service
password to gain access to the system.
See Remote Access.
directed pickup: See Call Pickup
Directed.
Directory number (DN): A unique
number that is automatically assigned to
each telephone or data terminal. The
DN, also referred to as an internal
number, is often used to identify a
telephone when settings are assigned
during programming.
Default DN assignments start at 221.
DISA DN: The received number
assigned to the Norstar direct inward
system access facility. If a caller dials a
number that is assigned to the
DISA DN, the caller hears stuttered dial
tone and must enter a Class of Service
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
266 / Glossary
password. Once the password is
accepted, the caller hears system dial
tone and can use Remote Access
features. See Remote Access.
Disconnect Supervision: A setting
that enables the Norstar system to detect
if an external caller hangs up. Once an
external caller hangs up, the Norstar
system can disconnect its line.
Disconnect Supervision is enabled
under Trunk/Line data in Lines
programming.
display: A liquid crystal display
(LCD) on the telephone that guides you
through feature operation and
programming.
display button: The Norstar M7310
telephone and M7324 telephone and the
Business Series Terminal T7316 and
T7316E are each equipped with three
buttons located directly beneath the
display. During feature operation or
programming, some or all of these
buttons may be used to provide further
options. If an option is available, it is
shown in the bottom row of the two-row
display, directly above the
corresponding display button. Display
buttons are represented in this manual as
underlined capital, such as OK.
²¡Þ
DN: See Directory number.
Do Not Disturb:
A feature that stops calls from ringing at
your telephone. Only Priority Calls will
ring at your telephone. A line button will
flash when you receive a call, but the
call will not ring.
DTMF: See Dual tone multifrequency.
dual tone multifrequency: Two
distinct telephone signaling tones used
for dialing.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
E
Emergency 911 dialing: The
capability to access a public emergency
response system by dialing the digits
9-1-1. State and local requirements for
support of Emergency 911 Dialing
service by Customer Premises
Equipment vary. Consult your local
telecommunications service provider
regarding compliance with applicable
laws and regulations.
emergency telephone: A single-line
telephone, also referred to as a 500/2500
telephone, that becomes active when
there is no power to the ICS.
evening schedule: See Schedules,
and Services.
event message: Event messages are
stored in the system log and displayed
during a Maintenance session. They
record a variety of events and activities
in the Norstar system.
exceptions: See Overrides.
external call: A call to a destination
outside the Norstar system.
External Call Forward: See Line
Redirection.
external code: The number you dial
to get an external line. By default it is 9,
but this can be changed under Access
codes in Sys prgrmmng. You do not
always need an external code. It is
primarily to support the M7100 and
T7100 telephones, and single-line
telephones using an Analog Terminal
Adapter.
external line: A line on your system
telephone used for making calls to
destinations outside the Norstar system.
external music source: See Music
source.
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Glossary / 267
external paging: A feature you can
use to make voice announcements over
an externally-mounted loudspeaker
connected to the ICS. The external
speaker is not a Norstar component and
must be supplied by the customer.
F
²
feature button: Many Norstar
features are invoked by pressing the
Feature (
) button followed by a
feature code. The feature button is also
used to exit a feature.
²¥Ü
feature code: A number that is used
to activate a particular feature.
Feature programming:
Allows you to program a feature code
onto a memory button.
Forward: See Call Forward.
Full Autohold (on idle line): When
this feature is on, if you select an
available line and then do something
that selects another line, the first line is
put on hold. Full Autohold is enabled
under Trunk/Line data in Lines
programming.
Full handsfree: See handsfree.
G
²¡âÛ
Group Listening:
A feature that allows you to have others
in your office hear a caller through your
telephone speaker. The caller hears you
only when you speak into the receiver.
They cannot hear other people in the
office.
You can cancel Group Listen for the
current call. Group Listen is cancelled
automatically when you hang up the
Group Listen call.
H
Handsfree:
A feature you can use to make calls
without using the telephone receiver.
Full Handsfree is activated under
Capabilities in Terminals&Sets
programming. When it is activated, a
handsfree/mute button is automatically
assigned to the telephone.
Handsfree (HF) Answerback:
When activated, this feature
automatically turns on the microphone
at a telephone receiving a Voice Call so
that the person receiving the call can
respond without lifting the receiver. It is
activated under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Handsfree/Mute button: See
handsfree.
Hardware: A section in programming
that shows what equipment has been
installed in the ICS. This section is
accessed by the installer.
headset: A head-mounted or
ear-mounted telephone receiver that is
used instead of the hand-held receiver.
Headsets are not Norstar components
and must be supplied by the customer.
Held (Line) Reminder: A system
telephone rings and displays the
message On hold: LINENAM when an
external call has been placed on hold for
a certain period of time. The Held Line
Reminder feature and Remind delay
are set under Feature settings in Sys
prgrmmng.
HF Answerback: See handsfree
answerback.
³
Hold button:
This button is used to suspend calls so
that the person using the telephone can
perform another task without
disconnecting the caller.
Hook Switch Flash: See Link time.
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
268 / Glossary
Host system signaling: (Also
referred to as end-to-end signaling.)
System telephones can access a remote
system or dial a number on an alternate
carrier by means of host feature
activation, such as Link, Pause and Run/
Stop.
Hospitality The Hospitality features
allow business which use hospitality
telephones, or room-based telephones,
to control access, alarms, and
maintenance duties through the
telephones.
Hotline: This feature automatically
calls a pre-assigned number when the
telephone receiver is lifted or the
handsfree/mute button is pressed. A
Hotline number can be an internal or
external number. Hotline is assigned
under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Hunt group: The hunt groups feature
allows a group of sets to be called by a
single directory number ensuring that
calls are easily routed to the appropriate
group.
I
I/C: An abbreviation of intercom.
ICS (integrated communication
system): The central hardware
component in the Norstar system. The
ICS has its own processor and memory,
and provides a physical point of
connection for the various types of
devices, telephones, and expansion
modules used in Norstar.
The ICS can function on its own as a
basic system (with 32 system telephones
and up to 48 external lines), or with the
addition of Trunk Modules (TM) that
supports more external lines, or Station
Modules (SM) that support more system
telephones.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
Integrated Services Digital
Network (ISDN): A digital telephone
service that allows for a combination
voice and data connection over a single,
high-speed connection. ISDN service
can operate over the same copper
twisted-pair telephone line as analog
telephone service.
intercom button: A button that
provides access to internal lines used for
calls within a Norstar system and access
to external lines through a line pool or
external code. A telephone may be
assigned zero to eight Intercom buttons.
This is done under Line access in
Terminals&Sets programming.
intercom keys: See Intercom button.
internal line: A line on your telephone
dedicated to making calls to destinations
inside your Norstar system. An internal
line may still connect you with an
external caller if you use it to access a
line pool or to pick up a call using
Norstar call handling features such as
Call Park or Call Pickup Directed.
internal number: A number, also
referred to as a Directory Number or
DN, that identifies a Norstar telephone
or device.
internal user: Someone using a
system telephone within a Norstar
system.
ISDN: See integrated services digital
network.
ISDN DN: A directory number (DN)
used by ISDN terminal equipment
connected to the ICS. The system uses a
maximum of thirty ISDN DNs.
K
key indicator module (KIM):
This module is configured similarly to
the CAP module except that, as an
eKIM, it can support multiple target
lines and Hunt Group DNs. You can
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Glossary / 269
attach one or more module to a T7316E
telephone.
²Þ
L
Last Number Redial:
A feature that allows you to redial the
last external number you dialed.
Fixed line:
A telecommunications line between two
service points leased from a
communications carrier for private use,
usually incurring a monthly service rate.
Fixed lines setting is used solely by data
modules.
Least cost routing: See Routing
service.
line: The complete path of a voice or
data connection between one telephone
(or other device) and another.
Lines: A programming section that
allows you to assign settings to each
trunk and external line. Lines
programming can be done by an
Installer or a System Coordinator Plus.
A System Coordinator can program the
name of a line.
The system may be set up to give a brief
ring when a call comes in on a redirected
line, under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
This feature differs from Call Forward
in two ways: It redirects only external
calls, not internal calls, and it redirects
calls to destinations outside the system.
Call forward redirects calls only to
destinations inside the Norstar system.
See Call Forward.
²àÚ
Link:
If your Norstar system is connected to a
Private Branch Exchange (PBX), you
can use a Link signal to access special
features. The Link signal can also be
included as part of a longer stored
sequence on an External Autodial
button or in a Speed Dial code. The Link
symbol (¤) uses two of the 24 spaces
in a dialing sequence.
²¡â¡
Long Tones:
A feature that allows you to control the
length of a tone so that you can signal
devices such as fax or answering
machines which require tones longer
than the standard 120 milliseconds.
Line number: A number that
identifies an external line. The total
number of lines depends on how many
Trunk Modules are installed.
Lunch schedule: See Schedules,
and Services.
Line Pool:
A group of lines used for making
external calls. Line pools provide an
efficient way of giving a telephone
access to external lines without taking
up many line buttons. A line is assigned
to be part of a line pool under Trunk/
Line data in Lines programming.
M7000 telephone This telephone has
a no display. It does have four memory
buttons. (Note this telephone is only
supported on systems running Profile 2,
3, or 4).
²ßÝ
²¡Ý
Line Redirection:
A feature that allows you to redirect all
calls on an incoming line to a
destination outside the Norstar system.
Once a line is redirected it cannot be
answered within the Norstar system.
P0603535 02
M
M7100 telephone: A telephone with
a single line display and one
programmable memory button without
an indicator.
M7208 telephone: A telephone with
a single-line display and eight
programmable memory buttons with
indicators.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
270 / Glossary
M7310 telephone: A telephone that
has a two-line display, three display
buttons, 10 programmable memory
buttons with indicators, and 12 dual
memory programmable buttons without
indicators. An M7310 can be equipped
with a Busy Lamp Field.
M7324 telephone: A telephone with
a two-line display, three display buttons,
and 24 programmable memory buttons
with indicators. An M7324 telephone
can be equipped with a CAP module.
Malicious Caller ID (MCID) This
feature is a European ETSI-based
network feature that allows a user to use
record the caller
information at the service provider.
²¡áà
memory buttons: Buttons that can be
programmed to dial frequently used
features or numbers automatically. See
M7100/T7100, M7208/T7208, M7310,
T7316/T7316E, and M7324 telephone
entries for their exact memory button
configurations.
message: A feature that allows you to
send a message to another Norstar user.
The Message feature also allows you to
know if you have any messages waiting
and maintains a Message Waiting List to
keep a record of your internal messages
and your (external) voice mail
messages.
Message Waiting Indicator: PRI
lines can provide the signal that cause
the set to display a message-waiting
message, or light a lamp on the set to
indicate a voice message.
²¥¡Ú
Monitoring See Silent Monitoring.
Move Line buttons:
A feature that allows you to move
assigned lines to different buttons (with
indicators) on your telephone.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
Music source: A radio or other
source of music can be connected to the
Integrated Communication System to
provide music for the Music on Hold
and Background Music features. A
music source is not part of the Norstar
system and must be supplied by the
customer.
N
Names: Names can be assigned to
System Speed Dial numbers, external
lines, telephones, and service schedules.
This is done in programming. You can
use up to 16 characters to name a
System Speed Dial number, and seven
characters to name a telephone, line, or
schedule. If a Name has not been
assigned, the line number or DN will
appear on the display instead of a name.
Network DN: A number supplied by
the ISDN network service provider for
ISDN terminal equipment.
Night schedule: See Schedules, and
Services.
O
On hold: A setting, programmed
under Feature settings in Sys
prgrmmng, that controls whether
external callers hear music, periodic
tones, or silence when they are placed
on hold.
overlay: See Programming overlay.
overflow: A setting in Routing
Service that allows users to decide
what path an outgoing call will take if all
the lines used in a particular route are in
use when the call is made.
Overrides: One component of a
restriction filter. Overrides are numbers
you can dial even if they are forbidden
by a more general restriction. See
Restrictions.
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Glossary / 271
P
²ßâ
Page:
A feature you can use to make
announcements over the Norstar
system. You can make page
announcements over the telephone
speakers and/or external speakers.
Page Time out: A setting that
controls how long a Page
Announcement can last. It can be
assigned under Feature settings in
Sys prgrmmng.
Page zone: An area in the office that
receives internal page announcements
independently of the rest of the office.
Each page zone is identified by a
number. Telephones are assigned to
page zones under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Park prefix: See Call park prefix.
Park timeout: The time before an
unanswered parked call is routed back to
the telephone that parked it. Park
timeout is configured under Feature
settings in Sys prgrmmng.
Password: A password is a specific
sequence of digits that you enter to gain
access to Norstar programming, to
override dialing restrictions, or to use
remote access with DISA.
Passwords: A programming section
that allows you to assign or change COS
passwords, Call log passwords, or any
of the programming passwords. Under
Passwords programming, you can only
modify the passwords for your level of
programming.
²à¡
Pause:
A feature that enters a 1.5-second delay
in a dialing sequence on an external line.
This is often required for signaling
remote devices, such as answering
machines, or when reaching through to
PBX features or host systems. The
P0603535 02
Pause symbol (›) uses one of the 24
spaces in a dialing sequence. For pulse
dialing,
inserts a 1.5 second pause
into the dialing sequence.
¥
²àÞ
PBX: private branch exchange.
Pickup Group:
A telephone can be placed into one of
nine call pickup groups. A call ringing at
a telephone within a pickup group can
be picked up at any other telephone
within the same pickup group. A
telephone is assigned to a pickup group
under Capabilities in
Terminals&Sets programming.
Pool: See Line pool.
portable telephone: See Companion
portable telephone
Pre-dial: A feature that allows you to
enter a number and check it on your
telephone display before it is actually
dialed. If the number is incorrect, you
can edit it. The number is dialed only
when you pick up the receiver or select
a line.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI): An
ISDN interface which uses
23 B channels and a D channel (23B+D)
for profiles 1, 3 and 4, and D channel
(30B+D) for Profile2.
Prime line: The line on your
telephone that is automatically selected
when you lift the receiver, press the
handsfree/mute button or use an
external dialing feature.
A Prime Line is assigned to a telephone
under Line access in Terminals&Sets
programming.
Prime Set (prime telephone): A
telephone that provides backup
answering for incoming calls on
external lines. The prime telephone for a
line will ring for any unanswered calls
on that line. A prime telephone is
assigned to a line under Trunk/Line
data in Lines programming.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
272 / Glossary
²ßá
Priority Call:
If you get a busy signal when you call
someone in your office, you can
interrupt them for an urgent call. This
feature is enabled for a telephone under
Capabilities in Terminals&Sets
programming.
Privacy: This feature determines
whether a Norstar user may select a line
in use at another telephone and join an
established call. Privacy is enabled
under Trunk/Line data in Lines
programming, but can be turned on and
off by users during individual calls.
Private line: See Private to.
Private Monitoring This feature
allows a user with a two-line display
telephone that has been designated as a
supervisor telephone, to monitor Hunt
group calls from external sources using
.
²¥ÞÞâ
Private network: A telephone
network consisting of owned or leased
telephone lines used to connect different
offices of an organization independently
of the public network.
Private Network Identifier (PNI)
this is an identifying digit or set of digits
assigned to each system in a private
network with a Meridian system. These
codes are provided by the Meridian
system administrator when the node is
brought on to the network.
Private to: Allows you to select the
telephone that will use the line
exclusively. The line cannot appear on
any other telephone, except the prime
telephone for that line. Private lines
cannot be placed into line pools.
Private lines are assigned under
Trunk/Line data in Lines
programming.
²¥¡á
¨
Programmed release:
A feature that performs
the function of the
button in a
programmed dialing sequence.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
programming: Setting the way the
Norstar system will work. Programming
includes system-wide settings and
individual telephone and line settings.
programming overlay: A paper
template that is placed over the four
memory buttons with indicators on the
M7310, T7316, T7316E or M7324
telephone during programming. The
overlay labels indicate the special
function that each of the four buttons
takes on in programming.
public line: An external line that can
be assigned to any telephone and to
many telephones. A line is assigned as
Public under Trunk/Line data in Lines
programming.
public network: The regular
telephone network that connects most
homes and businesses.
Public Safety Answering Point
(PSAP): This is the first point of
contact a caller reaches after dialing
911.
pulse/tone dialing: An external line
setting for pulse or tone dialing. Pulse is
the traditional method of dialing used by
rotary-dial or push- button single-line
telephones. Tone dialing allows
telephones to communicate with other
devices such as answering machines.
Tone dialing is required to access the
features that PBX systems may offer or
to use another Norstar system remotely.
R
recall: See Link time.
receiver: The handset of a telephone.
receiver card: An abbreviated list of
system feature codes that is stored under
the telephone receiver. The card is
found on a perforated sheet that comes
with a system telephone.
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Glossary / 273
Remind delay: A feature that causes a
telephone to beep and display the
message On hold: LINENAM when a call
has been on hold for a programmable
period of time. This period is the
Remind delay.
Remote access: The ability to dial
into a Norstar system from outside the
system and make use of selected Norstar
features. The lines, features, and dialing
capabilities available to a remote user
are determined by the Class of Service.
If the remote access line is answered
with DISA, the user must enter a Class
of Service password to gain access to
the Norstar system features.
remote access dial restriction:
See Remote restriction.
Remote capability: A subset of
Norstar features that are available to
users connected through remote access.
Remote monitoring: A feature that
allows an off-site technician with a PC
call in and troubleshoot your system
through the built-in modem.
Remote paging: This feature allows
remote users to use the Norstar paging
feature. Access to this feature is
governed by the Class of Service for the
call. See Remote Access and Class of
Service.
Remote restriction: A restriction
filter applied to a line in order to control
which digits can be dialed during an
incoming remote access call. It is the
equivalent of a set filter for a remote
user.
remote user: Someone who calls into
a Norstar system from a telephone
outside that system and uses Norstar
features or lines. See Remote Access.
Restriction filter: Through a
combination of restrictions and
overrides, restriction filters prevent
certain telephone numbers or feature
P0603535 02
codes from being dialed. Restriction
filters can be applied to lines, sets,
specific lines on a set, and to Class of
Service passwords. The Norstar system
can handle up to 100 restriction filters.
Restriction service: A Services
section that allows you to assign
alternate dialing filters to lines,
telephones, lines on a particular
telephone, and alternate remote filters to
lines at specified times of the day and on
specified days.
restrictions: One component of a
Dialing filter. Restrictions are numbers
you cannot dial when that dialing filter
is in effect. See Exceptions.
²Û
Ring Again:
A feature that can be used when you
can't get through to someone on your
Norstar system because their telephone
is busy or there is no answer. Ring
Again instructs the Norstar system to
inform you when they hang up or next
use their telephone.
ring group: A setting under Services
that allows you to assign a number of
different telephones to ring during one
of the schedules.Up to 20 ring groups
can be programmed by an installer or a
system coordinator plus.
²¥ß
²¥¡â
ring type:
A feature that allows you to select one of
four distinctive rings for your telephone.
ring volume:
A feature that allows you to set the
volume at which your telephone rings.
ringing service: A Services section
that allows you to make additional
telephones ring at specified times of the
day and on specified days.
Release button: Ends a call in the
same way that hanging up the receiver
does. The Release button may also be
used to end programming, Maintenance
sessions, and feature operations.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
274 / Glossary
Routing: See Routing service.
Routing service: A programming
section that allows outgoing calls to be
directed automatically based on the
numbers a caller dials. For Norstar
systems linked in a network, routing can
create a transparent or coordinated
dialing plan. It can also be used to direct
calls to the least expensive lines
according to a Services schedule
(sometimes called least cost routing).
²¥á
Run/Stop:
A feature that creates a break point in a
programmed external dialing sequence.
When you press a programmed key, the
system dials the number up to the run/
stop. When you press it again, the
system dials the digits following the run/
stop.
S
²ßà
Saved Number Redial:
A feature that allows you to save the
number of the external call you are on
(providing you dialed the call) so that
you can call it again later.
Schedules: Any of six different sets
of services that can be applied to your
Norstar system. A schedule can be
activated manually from a control
telephone or activated automatically at
specified times. See also Services.
Selective line redirection: See Line
Redirection.
Service modes See Services.
Service Profile Identifier: See
SPID.
Services: A programming section
that allows you to assign which
telephones ring, which restrictions
apply, and which call routing is used
during any of six different schedules.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
There are three services: Ringing
service, Restriction service and Routing
service, all found in Services
programming.
set: A telephone.
Set Copy: A programming section
that allows you to copy programmable
settings from one telephone to another
of the same type. Set Copy provides two
options: duplicating System Data and
User Data, or duplicating System Data
only. Set Copy does not provide the
same copy capability as COPY, which is
more selective of the settings that can be
duplicated.
Set filter: See Restriction filter.
Set lock (telephone lock): This
feature allows you to limit the number
of features that may be used or
programmed at a telephone. Full set
lock allows very few changes or
features, Partial set lock allows some
changes and features, and No set lock
allows any change to be made and any
feature to be used. Set lock is assigned
under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets
programming.
Set relocation: See Automatic
Telephone Relocation.
shift button: A small triangular
button beside the dual memory buttons
on the upper half of the M7310
telephone. You press the shift button to
store or access features on the top half of
the dual memory buttons.
Silent Monitoring
This feature allows a user with a twoline display telephone that has been
designated as a supervisor telephone, to
monitor Hunt group calls from external
sources using
.
²¥ÞÞâ
²¡âÜ
Show Time:
While on a call, accessing this feature
allows you to see the current date and
time on the Norstar telephone display.
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Glossary / 275
Startup programming: When a
Norstar system is first installed and
powered up, Startup programming must
be performed before any programming
can be done. Startup initializes the
system programming to defaults.
System programming: A
programming section that allows you to
assign and maintain certain settings on
the Norstar system. System
programming is performed by an
installer or system coordinator plus.
Station: An individual telephone or
other Norstar device.
System speed dial code: A threedigit code (001 to 255) that can be
programmed to dial a telephone number
up to 24 digits long. System speed dial
codes are programmed for the entire
Norstar system under the System Speed
programming heading.
System coordinator: The person
responsible for customizing the Norstar
system through programming and for
helping co-workers use the Norstar
system.
System coordinator password: A
one- to six-digit password that prevents
unauthorized access to programming.
The System coordinator password can
be assigned and changed in Passwords
programming.
System coordinator plus: A
system coordinator who also performs
technical and maintenance functions for
the Norstar system.
System coordinator plus
password: A one- to six-digit
password that prevents unauthorized
access to programming. The System
coordinator plus password can be
assigned and changed in Passwords
programming.
System coordinator
programming: The programming
settings that are most commonly
changed once the Norstar system is
installed.
Press
,
then
to access System
coordinator programming.
² ¥¥‚¯öìéí
ë÷éö
system data: An option in the Set
Copy function. System Data refers to
the programmable system settings that
apply to all telephones and lines.
P0603535 02
System ID: The System ID (or System
Security number) can be accessed on
any programming telephone display by
pressing
, or
.
²¥¥êçêéë
²¥¥àáàÝÜ
²¥ÞÜÞ²¥ÞÛâ to
System-wide Call Appearance
(SWCA) keys
These 16 feature
codes can be assigned to buttons with
indicators on a group of telephones to
provide call appearance for incoming
calls that can be answered by any
telephone in the group. At the same
time, the indicator displays the current
status of the call.
T
T7000 telephone This telephone has
a no display. It does have four memory
buttons. This telephone functions in the
same way as the M7000 telephone.
(Note this telephone is only supported
on systems running Profile 2, 3, or 4).
T7100 Business Series Terminal:
A telephone with a single line display
and one programmable memory button
without an indicator.
T7208 Business Series Terminal:
A telephone with a single-line display
and eight programmable memory
buttons with indicators.
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
276 / Glossary
T7316 Business Series Terminal:
A telephone that has a two-line display,
three display buttons, 16 programmable
memory buttons with indicators, and 12
memory programmable buttons without
indicators.
T7316E Business Series
Terminal: This telephone has the same
functionality as the T7316, with some
additional features, such as a separate
handsfree key, special display icons
(when running on a MICS 6.1 or newer
system), and CAP capability by adding
KIMs.
T7406 telephone: This portable
handset functions very similarly to the
T7310 telephone. Functions and
installation are all described in separate
documentation specific to the telephone.
Target lines: Lines used to answer
incoming calls only. A target line routes
a call according to digits it receives from
an incoming trunk. They are referred to
by line numbers in the same way as
physical lines.
Telco features: A programming
section that allows you to specify the
external telephone numbers that are
dialed by the Message feature to retrieve
voice messages, or to set up CLASS
(CMS) services for lines and sets. Telco
features are accessed by an installer or a
system coordinator plus.
Terminal equipment (TE): A
generic term for devices that connect to
an ISDN network. Examples of ISDN
TE are ISDN telephones, computers
equipped with ISDN cards and video
terminals.
Terminals and Sets: A
programming section that allows you to
assign and change settings that apply to
the telephones and other devices
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
connected to the Norstar system.
Terminals and Sets programming is
performed by an installer or a system
coordinator.
Time and date: A programming
section that allows you to manually
change time or date. The time and date
can also be changed by pressing
and entering the
Basic password or one of the
programming passwords.
¥¥æé÷ä
²àâ
Transfer:
A feature that allows you to redirect a
call to another telephone in your Norstar
system, over a network or outside your
Norstar system.
Transfer Callback: If a transferred
call is not answered after a specific
number of rings, the call will return to
the telephone that made the transfer.
The number of rings is assigned under
Feature settings in System
programming. Transfer Callback does
not apply to calls transferred externally.
Trunk: The physical connection
between the Norstar system and the
outside world using either the public
telephone system or a private network.
²¡ââ
Trunk Answer:
A feature you can use to answer a call on
any line that has an active Ringing
service Service Mode, even if that line
does not appear on your telephone.
Trunk Answer is enabled in Services
programming.
U
Uniform Dialing Plan: (UDP) This
type of dialing plan uses a location code
to identify each node on a private
network. Dialing sequence: (destination
code)+(location code)+DN.
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Glossary / 277
User Data: User Data is an option in
the Set Copy feature. User Data refers to
the personal settings that are unique to
an individual telephone, and are not
programmed for the system. User Data
is programmed at each telephone.
These settings, for example, include
user Speed Dial and the assignment of
programmable memory buttons.
User Filter: See Restriction filter.
User Preferences: a programming
section that allows you to assign
autodialers, user speed dial codes,
display contrast, and other settings to a
specific telephone or person. You do not
have to program these settings at the
person’s telephone. User preferences
are assigned in Terminals and Sets
programming.
telephone has a display. If you have
Voice Message Waiting Indication, you
can program the telephone numbers
required to access up to five different
Voice Message Centers. You can also
program which of the five Centers is to
be accessed by each specific line.
W
²¡âÝ
Wait for dial tone:
A feature that causes of sequence of
numbers to pause until dial tone is
present on the line before continuing to
dial. The Wait for dial tone symbol (‡)
uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing
sequence. This feature requires a
Services or Combo Cartridge.
wireless: See Companion.
²¥Ý
User Speed Dial:
Three-digit codes (256-279) can be
programmed to dial external telephone
numbers. User Speed Dial numbers are
programmed for each telephone, and
can be used only at the telephone on
which they are programmed.
V
²ßß
Voice Call:
A feature you can use to make an
announcement or begin a conversation
through the speaker of another
telephone in the Norstar system. The
telephone you call will not ring. Instead,
the person you call will hear a beep and
then your voice. Their telephone will
beep periodically to remind them that
their microphone is open.
²¡¡
Voice Call deny:
A feature that prevents your telephone
from receiving Voice Calls.
Voice message center: If you have
subscribed to Call Display services you
can receive visual Voice Message
Waiting Indication, providing your
P0603535 02
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
278 / Glossary
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index
Symbols
²
§ Long Distance symbol 257
Autobumping
canceling (#815) 139
enable (815) 139
autodial button
external (*1) 87
internal (*2) 87
autodial button, external (*0) 90
Background Music
canceling (#86) 201
turning on (86) 201
Button Inquiry (*0) 94, 247, 254
Call Forward
canceling (#4) 113
using (4) 113, 114
Call Information (811) 55
Call Log
entering (812) 141
options (*84) 138
password (*85) 141, 142
viewing (812) 139
Call Park (74) 106
Call Pickup (75) 60
Call Queuing (801) 99
Call Transfer
canceling (#70) 103
using (70) 66, 101
Camp-on (82) 104
Class of Service (68) 243
Conference Call
7100 sets (#3) 65
on Hold, 7100 sets (#3) 66
using (3) 64
Contrast Adjustment (*7) 146
Dialing Modes (*82) 82
Directed Pickup (76) 59
Do Not Disturb
canceling (#85) 200
turning on (85) 83, 200
Exclusive Hold (79) 98
Feature Button, programming (*3)
147
Group Listening
P0603535 02
canceling (#802) 68
using (802) 68
Hide message display (806) 162
Host System Dialing Signals
Link (71) 234
Long Tones (808) 236
Pause (78) 236
Programmed Release (*89) 237
Run/Stop (*9) 237
Wait for Dial Tone (804) 238
Last Number Redial (5) 90
Line Pool Access (64) 81
Line Redirection
canceling (#84) 120
using (84) 118
Message
canceling (#1) 130
sending (1) 129
viewing (65) 130
Page
combined zone (63) 125
external zone (62) 125
internal zone (61) 125
using (60) 106
Password
Basic 23, 224
Call Log (*85) 141, 142
System Coordinator 29, 37, 39
System Coordinator (ADMIN)
27, 224
Priority Call (69) 84
Privacy (83) 75
Restriction Service
turning off (#872) 220
turning on (872) 220
Ring Again
canceling (#2) 86
using (2) 86
Ring Type (*6) 162
Ring Volume (*80) 162
Ringing Service
turning off (#871) 220
turning on (871) 220
Routing Service
turning off (#873) 220
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
280 / Index
turning on (873) 220
Services, viewing (870) 222
Speed Dial
adding user (*4) 92
making calls (0) 92
Static Time and Date (806) 133
Testing
display (805) 254
power supply (805) 256
telephone buttons (805) 255
telephone handset (805) 255
telephone headset (805) 255
telephone speaker (805) 256
Time (803) 76
Time and Date (**TIME) 29, 225
Trunk Answer (800) 62
User Preferences (**USER) 163,
225
Voice Call (66) 134
Voice Call Deny
canceling (#88) 135
using (88) 135
ð
Page
using (60) 125
¤ Link symbol 234
› Pause symbol 236
fi Programmed Release symbol 237
fl Run/Stop symbol 238
‡ Wait for Dial Tone symbol 238
2-way DID
PRI 205
7100 set
Call Park 106
7100 sets
CallBack 105
camping a call 105
Line Redirection 118
Ring Again 258
transferring a call 103
911
description 13
911 service 199
compliance 205
maintaining records 205
A
access
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
change COS password 243
dialtone for remote calls 242
external lines 249
fast busy tone for remote calls 242
from outside the system 239
remote access tones 242
stuttered dial tone for remote
access 242
using a COS 240
using a DISA 240
Access denied 257
accidental release 76
active services, display indicator 223
ADD 251
adjusting the display 146
administration password (see System
Coordinator password)
administration programming 14
administration set
controlling alarms 192
hospitality 185
using 190
alarm
cancel 194
Hospitality 191
turn off 194
using 193
Alarm 61-4-2 253
alarm number, recording 253
alarm telephone, description 253
alarms
controlling with admin set 192
query on admin set 192
reporting and recording codes 253
all lines, redirection 119
Allow calls 200
allow redirect
programming 120
Already joined 61, 78
Already parked 107
alternate services 217
analog telephone
answering a message 129
delaying snooze alarm 194
removing a message 132
replying to a message 131
sending messages 128
setting room, Hospitality 190
turn off alarm 194
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 281
using wake-up alarms 193
analog terminal adapter (see ATA)
announcement
paging 125
Voice Call 134
answer
programming Handsfree
answerback 73
Trunk answer 62
answer button
assigning to sets 160
attendant 63
type 63
answer DNs
answer key 63
answering calls
Answer DNs 63
Call Display services 55
Call Duration Timer 75
Call Pickup 59
CAP 48
Conference Calls 64
directed pickup 59
distinctive ring patterns 46
ending a call 55
Group Listening 68
group pickup 60
Handsfree 69
hearing aid compatibility 55
line indicators 44
prime telephone 47
Privacy 74
several Hold calls 97
TAP 50
Trunk Answer 62
using line buttons 44
using SWCA keys 108
Voice Call 135
answering incoming calls
hunt groups 43
apply button labels 149
assign an alarm time 192
assign lines
Hunt Groups 173
sets 247
ATA
dialing signals 236
using dialing modes 83
attendant answer button 63
P0603535 02
Auto Call information (see Caller ID set)
auto-answer, using COS password 242
autobumping, enable/disable 139
autodial
button inquiry 145
choosing a line 88
for M7100 and T7100 88
line pool access code 88
line selection 88
programming 87
set lock 232
storing number on a memory button
87
using intercom line for 88
using Last Number Redial 91
Autodial full 88
automatic
Call information 58
Call Log 137
dial 82
Handsfree 73
Hold 97
logging calls 142
release of a line, see Disconnect
Supervision
restriction service 218
automatic call back, ISDN terminal
feature 211
Automatic Call Forward, changing
settings 115
automatic recall, ISDN terminal feature
211
automatic telephone relocation 199
auxiliary ringer
Hunt Groups 179
auxiliary ringer, programming 233
B
background music
licensing 201
set lock 232
turning off 201
using 201
Basic
password 14, 163
password, changing 224
Restriction and Routing service 221
basic
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
282 / Index
answer button 63
BKSP 251
blocking
calls, see Do Not Disturb and DND
name and number 205
break point, host system dialing, Run/
Stop 237
BRI
ISDN description 203
ISDN services 208
Name and Number Blocking 210
network features 209
Network Name Display 209
broadcast, Hunt Groups, programming
174
business name
features 209
name display, outgoing 204
Business Series Terminal
programming overlay 21
Business Series Terminals
Handsfree 69
installing 195
viewing line profile 245
viewing set profile 245
wall mounting sets 196
busy
call forward on busy 116
CLID display for incoming call 56
DND on busy 116
Do Not Disturb 40
Hunt Group line setting 176
Hunt Group routing 176
priority call 83
programming call forward 39
tone, remote access 242
busy 77, 85
busy tone
Hunt Group routing 176
button caps
clear 150
pre-printed, colored 150
button defaults
M7100/T7100 159
M7208 and T7208 158
M7310 155
M7310 dual memory buttons 156
M7310 lower buttons 155
M7324 telephone 157
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
T7316 Business Series Terminal
151, 153
Button erased 89
Button Inquiry 145
buttons
Answer DNs/answer key 63
asssign handsfree and mute 73
Button Inquiry 145
CAP 48
changing programming 164
changing user speed dials 165
default assingment 150
dialpad 17
display 17, 19
eKIM 53
erasing programmed features 147
Feature 17, 18
handsfree 18
Hold 17, 18
labels, applying 149
Last Number Redial 90
line button assignment 247
line button indicators 248
line pool feature code 249
memory 17, 87, 250
moving line 161
mute 18
numbering on all telephone types
164
programming features on 147
Release 17, 18, 55
Saved Number Redial 94
TAP 53
testing 254, 255
using a line button 79
using buttons 16
volume control 18
bypassing a Hotline telephone 230
C
call
disconnecting, conference call 65
ending a call 55
independent hold, on conference
65
overflow 249
redial last number 90
Call 221? 258
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 283
Call blocked 85
call blocking, turning privacy on 75
Call by Call
FX calls 206
Inwats calls 207
Outwats calls 206
PRI 206
Private calls, DID and DOD 206
Public calls, DID and DOD 206
see also CbC 206
Tie calls 206
call display, answering calls 55
Call Duration Timer 75
Call Forward
All Calls, set lock 232
All Calls,ISDN terminals 208
automatic, changing settings 115
Call Forward No Answer 37
Call Forward on Busy 39, 116
calling the number 211
cancel 211
canceling 113
change delay 115
Forward no answer 115
line redirection differences 122
No Answer, line redirection 115
overriding 114
programming 37, 115, 116
programming, no answer 37
service provider 210
to voice mail 117
using 114
call indicators 43
call information
changing what is shown first 58
displaying 57
displaying information 55
for specific call 56
getting information for a call on hold
57
service provider 137
Call Log
autobumping, enable/disable 139
automatic 137
automatic logging 142
calling from within 140
clearning password 226
erasing items 140
logging a call manually 138
P0603535 02
options 138
options, changing 166
password 141–142
canceling 142
changing 141
set 137
using 137
viewing 139
Call Park
description 106
picking up calls 247
retrieval codes 106
Call Pickup
Directed Pickup 59
message forwarded 129
picking up calls 247
Call Queuing
7100 series sets 258
using 99
call restrictions, Hospitality, rooms 188
Call traced 212
Call Transfer 101–104
call transfer
cancelling 103
external calls 102
using 101
Call(s) bumped 143
Callback, using 112
Caller ID set, automatic call information
58
Calling 85
calling party name 204
calls
accidental release 76
allow line redirection programming
120
answering calls on CAP 48
answering calls on TAP 50
answering prime telephone 47
answering with direct pickup 59
answering with group pickup 60
answering with Handsfree 69
automatic dial 82
automatic display 58
automatic Hold 97
blocking the Link feature 235
call queuing 99
cancelling call forward 113
cancelling DND 200
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
284 / Index
changing Call forward no answer
115
changing how you dial 82
changing to Handsfree 70
checking duration 75
display call information 57
display call information for hold call
57
external call transfer 102
forwarding to internal set 113
forwarding to voice mail 117
from within Call Log 140
holding several calls 97
listening while on Hold 98
making a private call 75
making from ISDN terminal 82
monitoring with CAP 50, 54
muting Handsfree 70
overriding call foward 114
programming 2-way DID 205
programming paging 126
putting on Exclusive hold 84
refusing second call 200
restriction services 217
retrieving a parked call 106
retrieving held call 97
routing outgoing calls 218
saved number redial 94
security on remote access 240
specific call information 56
standard dial 82
tracking incoming calls 137
using answer key 63
using DND 200
using Do Not Disturb 200
using line button 44
using Link for external calls 234
using Pause for external calls 236
using pre-dial 83
using ring again 85
using speed dial 92
ways to make a 77
Camp denied 105
Camp max 105
Camp to 105
Camped 105, 258
camping calls (see Camp-on)
camp-on
tones 104
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
using 104
Can't ring again 78, 86
CANCEL 251
cancel
a transfer 103
Call Forward 113
call log password 142
Do Not Disturb 200
group listening 68
Hospitality alarm 194
Line Redirection 119
pending alarm 192
sent message 130
voice call 135
Cancel denied 133
CANCL 165
CAP
answering calls 48
customizing 49
DID 48
monitoring calls 50, 54
moving buttons 161
prime telephone 48
sending messages 129
telephone 48
telephone, direct dial 228
using 48
central answering position (see CAP)
centrex template
M7208 158
M7310 lower buttons 155
M7324 buttons 158
T7208 158
T7316 buttons 151, 152, 154
CHANGE 165
change
alarm time 192
automatic Call Forward 115
call log options 166
call log password 141
COS password 243
day 31
dial method 82
display contrast 167
hour 30
how calls are dialed 166
Hunt Group auxiliary ringer 179
Hunt Group Name 178
language on display 167
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 285
line name 35
minutes 30
month 30
ring type 162, 167
user speed dial 165
year 30
choosing a line 79
Class of Service
changing 243
managing passwords 243
using a password 242
clear button caps 150
Cleared>LINENAM 133
CLID
display on busy 56
clock, set 31
CLR 165
code, system speed dial 32
colored button caps 150
common set, Hospitality 185
communicating in the office
paging 125–128
sending messages using display
128
Companion, Registration password 225
cond pswd, Hospitality 186
cond pswd, programming 227
condition, setting room condition 189
Conf. on hold 67
Conference busy 67
conference call
by releasing privacy 75
cancel group listening 68
conference on Hold 66
disconnecting from 66
disconnecting one call 65
group listening 68
independent Hold 65
making 64
no privacy button 74
releasing privacy 64
removing yourself from 66
splitting 66
using the Conference feature 64
connecting to ISDN network 213
contrast adjustment 146
control
calls, using alternate or scheduled
services 217
P0603535 02
system security on remote calls 240
using DISA 240
control telephone
enter Service feature code 221
setting service schedules 231
turn service off 221
turning services off/on 217
viewing active services 221
custom programming, moving sets 199
customizing CAP 49
customizing KIM 53
customizing your telephone
adjusting ring volume 162
Button Inquiry 145
changing ring type 162
contrast adjustment 146
User Preferences 163
D
data transfer, PRI 203
date and time
changing 29
displayed instead of messages 162
displaying 76
length of a call 75
date, change 225
day, set 31
default buttons
assignment 150
defaults
button assignments 150
buttons, T7316 Business Series
Terminal 151, 153
M7310 buttons 155
M7310 dual memory buttons 156
M7310 lower memory buttons 155
delay
call forward no answer 115
hunt 175
Delayed Ring Transfer 200
delete
Call Log items 139
call log password 142
messages from list 132
programmed features 147
Denied in admin 257
deny voice call 135
desk information, Hospitality 187
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
286 / Index
desk pswd 227
Desk pswd, programming 186
desktop conferencing, ISDN applications
214
destination code
line for external calls 231
dial tone, stuttered 242
Dial voice call 135
dialing
911 compliance 205
automatic dial 82
host system signals 234
modes 82
options 166
pre-dial 83
saved number 94
signal, Long Tones 236
signal, Pause 236
signal, Programmed Release 237
signal, run/stop 237
signal, switching from pulse to tone
238
signal, Wait for Dial Tone 238
standard dial 82
switching between pulse and tone
246
switching from pulse to tone 238
using Pause 236
dialing filters, Hospitality room states 189
dialing mode, set lock 232
dialing plan
enblock dialing 207
PRI 207
dialpad
change name 34
entering letters and numbers 29
entering numbers and letters 33
programming buttons 17
DID
2-way DID, PRI 205
calls, extra-dial telephone
ringing service 223
CAP lines 48
CbC private calls 206
CbC public calls 206
PRI description 203
DID template
M7208 158
M7310 lower buttons 155
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
M7324 buttons 158
T7208 158
T7316 buttons 152, 155
digital connections, to ISDN networks
and devices 213
direct dial, forward, external 228
direct inward system access (DISA), see
also DISA 240
direct-dial telephone
programming 229
using 228
DISA, COS password 240
disable autobumping 139
disconnect
from conference 66
releasing a call, accidentally 76
disconnect supervision, assigning 246
display
2-line 17
automatic caller ID display 58
button equivalents for one-line
display 251
buttons 17, 19
Call information 57
call information 56
changing contrast 146
changing first display 58
changing the language 167
contrast 167
Display digits 27
End of Session 27
name instead of number 199
network name, BRI 209
one-line 251
PRI Network Name Display 204
restoring message indication 162
system speed dial 33
time and date 76
display buttons
one-line display 251
user preferences 165
Display digits 27, 33
distinctive ring patterns(DRP)
answering a call 46
distinctive rings 162
distribution modes, Hunt Groups 174
DN (see internal numbers)
DND 105
DND from 47
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 287
DND on busy 116
DND transfer 47
DND, cancel 200
DNs
checking for updates 27
rooms 187
Do Not Disturb
canceling 200
on Busy 40
see also DND 200
set lock 232
using 200
Do not disturb 78, 85, 103
Do Not Disturb on Busy, see also DND
on busy 116
DOD
CbC private calls 206
CbC public calls 206
PRI description 203
DRT 47
dual memory buttons, defaults 156
duration of call 75
E
echo, handsfree 71
eKIM
button programming 53
emergency 911 13, 205
enable autobumping 139
enbloc dialing, PRI dialing plan 207
End of session 27
ending a call 55
ending test session 254
enhanced, answer button 63
Enter code 148
Enter digits 89, 93
Enter zone 127
entering letters through the dialpad 29
equipment, external page equipment
128
erasing
Call Log items 140
messages from list 132
programmed features 147
Evening Sched 223
Exchanged 161
Exclusive Hold 84, 98
Expensive route 78
P0603535 02
expensive route warning tone 249
extended, answer button 63
external
access to Norstar 239
access, describing line pools 249
access, using remote packages on
line pools 240
accessing voice mail 144
autodial, programming 87
Call Forward (see Line Redirection)
page 125
paging equipment 128
external calls
assigning Long Tones 236
line pool 231
transferring 102
using Link 234
using Programmed Release 237
external line
routing table 231
external line buttons 160
external lines
call fowarding 114
name display 199
external number, last number redial
description 90
external page option, default page button
159
extra-dial telephone
DID calls 223
direct dial 228
extra-dial telephone, DID 223
F
fast busy tone, remote access 242
FEATR 165
feature
Message Reply Enhancement,
analog telephones 131
privacy 74
using line redirection 123
using page types 125
voice call 134
feature button 17, 18, 232
feature code, control telephone 221
Feature moved 148
feature programming
add change speed dial number 32
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
288 / Index
allow line redirect 120
automatic call forward 115
auxiliary ringer 233
blocking redial numbers 95
broadcasting to Hunt Groups 174
call display, first display 58
call forward no answer 37
call forward on busy 39
call restrictions, Hospitality 188
change number of rings 38
changing line name 35
changing telephone name 34, 199
direct dial telephone 229
do not disturb on busy 40
external autodial 87
group pickup 60
Handsfree 72
handsfree answer back 73
Hospitality alarm 191
Hospitality passwords 185
hotline on telephone 230
hunt delay 175
Hunt Group busy line setting 176
Hunt Group queue timeout 177
last number redial 90
line redirect ring control 120
line redirection 118
Long Tones 236
overflow set 177
page zone 126
paging 126
Pause 236
programmed release 237
room/desk information 187
Run/Stop dialing signal 237
select speed dial line 32
service times 188
set lock 233
system speed dial 31
system speed dial name 33
time and date 29
Trunk Answer 62
user speed dial 92
using dialpad to enter letters 29
using Link 234
Wait for Dial Tone signal 238
Feature timeout 257
features
adjusting ring volume 162
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
Autobumping 139
autodial 87
auxiliary ringer 233
Button Inquiry 145
Call Display 55
Call Duration Timer 75
Call Forward 113
call forward, using 114
Call Information 56
Call Log 137
Call Park 106
Call Pickup 59
Call Queuing 99
Call Transfer 101
Callback 112
Camp-on 104
changing ring type 162
Class of Service password 243
Conference Calls 64
contrast adjustment 146
dialing modes 82
dialing signal
Programmed Release 237
run/stop 237
Wait for Dial Tone 238
Do Not Disturb 200
Do Not Disturb on Busy 116
Exclusive Hold 98
external call transfer 102
Group Listening 68
Handsfree 69, 71
hiding the message or calls display
162
Hold, many calls 97
independent Hold during
conference 65
Last Number Redial 90
limiting feature access 232
line pools 80
Line Redirection 118–123
Link 234
Messages, sending 128
moving line buttons 161
paging 125–128
Pause 236
PRI name and number blocking
205
priority call 83
Privacy 74
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 289
programming on buttons 147
remote access to the system 239
Restriction service 217
Ring Again 85
ring type 162
Ringing service 217
Routing service 218
Saved Number Redial 94
sending messages using analog
telephones 128
sending messages using display
128
Speed Dial 91
Test a Telephone 254–256
testing set features 254
Time and Date 225
User Preferences 163
file transfer using ISDN 214
filters, Hospitality room states 189
FIND 165
first display, changing 58
Foreign Exchange, see also FX
Forward denied 118
Forward no answer, changing 115
Forward> 118
forwarding calls 37
Call Forward 113
Call Forward delay 115
Call Forward No Answer 115
Call Forward on Busy 116
direct dial 228
Do Not Disturb on Busy 116
Line Redirection 118–123
to voice mail 117
Foward delay 38
FX
CbC type 206
see also Foreign Exchange 206
G
green button caps 150
grey button caps 150
Group 4 fax, using ISDN applications
214
group answering
SWCA keys 108
Group Listening 68
Group Pickup
P0603535 02
Hunt Groups 60
using 60
H
handling many calls at once
Call Queuing 99
Hold 97
handset speaker, testing 255
Handsfree
assign button 73
automatic answer 73
changing to handsfree 70
exiting to handset 71
headset 73
indicators 71
making calls 70
muting the set 70
preventing echo 71
programming 72
talking in turn 71
using 71
Handsfree 72
Handsfree Answerback
programming 73
Voice Call 135
handsfree button 18, 160
headset
Handsfree requirement 73
testing 255
hearing aid compatibility 55
Hidden number 78, 91, 95
Hold
automatic 97
button 17, 18
Conference Call 65
display call information 57
exclusive 98
exclusive hold 84
listening while on hold 98
putting conference on 66
re-establish conference call 65
retrieving call 97
using background music 201
using SWCA keys 108
Hold or release 143, 259
Hospitality
admin set, controlling alarms 192
alarm features 191
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
290 / Index
cancel alarm 194
cond password 186
delaying alarm 194
desk password 186
passwords 185
room/desk information 187
service done 189
service times 188
set description 185
sets per room 187
setting room condition 189
setting room dialing filters 189
turn off alarm 194
using administration set 190
using room set 190
using room/set programming 189
using the alarm 193
hospitality
password 227
Host system dialing signals
Long Tones 236
Pause 236
programmed release 237
Run/Stop 237
system speed dial 91
using an ATA 236
Wait for Dial Tone 238
Hotline
bypassing the telephone 230
setting up the telephone 230
using with Handsfree button 230
hour, set 30
hunt group
moving on telephone 161
Hunt Groups
adding members 171
answer incoming calls 43
assigning lines 173
auxiliary ringer 179
broadcast conversion note 169
Broadcast mode 174
busy line setting 176
busy routing 176
call forward no answer 38
call forward on busy 40, 116
call foward no answer 115
call park 107
calls on Hold 97
cannot use Voice Call feature 134
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
creating 246
distribution modes 174
DND on busy 117
group pickup 60
hotline, set DN 230
hunt delay 175
incoming calls 174
member DN 171
moving members 172
no videophones 170
overflow set 177
paging 126
priority call 84
programming 169
queue time-out 177
removing members 171
rerouting to a Hunt Group 63
Rotary mode 174
Sequential mode 174
setting the name 178
simultaneous ring 174
temporarily leaving group 201
unassigning lines 173
use Do Not Disturb 201
using call forward 114
using ring again 85
where to use 169
hunt groups
system monitoring 232
hybrid template
M7208 158
M7310 lower buttons 155
M7324 buttons 157
T7208 158
T7316 buttons 152, 155
I
In use 133, 260
In use SETNAME 143
Inactive feature 257
incoming call
CLID display on busy 56
incoming calls
2-way DID 205
hunt groups 43
indicators 43
overflow routing 249
simultaneous ring 174
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 291
SWCA keys 109
tracking 137
using COS on auto answer 242
Incoming Line Groups (ILG), see Hunt
Groups
Incoming only 260
indicators
active service display 223
call indicators on CAP 50
handsfree and mute 71
incoming call 43
line active 248
long distance call 257
memory buttons 250
message waiting, analog telephone
129
restoring message indicators 162
rings 45
installer programming 14
installing telephones 195–198
Integrated Services Digital Network (see
ISDN)
Intercom 121
Intercom # 89
intercom button
answer button calls 63
autodial line 88
using as the line for Autodial 88
internal numbers, description of length
247
internal page 125
Internet access, using ISDN applications
215
Invalid code 93, 238, 257
Invalid location 161
Invalid number 89, 103, 107, 260
Invalid state 212
Invalid zone 127
Inwat, CbC type 207
ISDN
2-way DID 205
applications 213–215
BRI features 209
BRI services 208
Call by Call 206
call forward all calls 208
connecting to 213
description 203
desktop conferencing, using 214
P0603535 02
device support on BRI 208
dialing plan, PRI 207
emergency 911 205
equipment 213–215
file transfer, using 214
Group 4 fax, using 214
Internet access using 215
LAN access, using remote 214
LAN to LAN bridging, using 215
leased line backup, using 214
making calls from ISDN terminals
82
Network Name DIsplay, BRI 209
ONN blocking, BRI 210
PRI name and number blocking
205
PRI Network Name Display 204
service provider features 210, 211
telecommuting, using 214
terminal line access 209
videoconferencing, using 213
ISDN terminal
Automatic Call Back 211
Automatic Recall 211
Call Forward 210
calling the call forward number 211
cancel Call Forward 211
no ONN 205
K
KIM
buttons on eKIM 53
customizing 53
sending messages 129
using 50
L
LAN
remote access using ISDN
applications 214
router 215
to LAN bridging, ISDN applications
215
language
changing on the display 167
set lock 232
last number redial 90
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
292 / Index
leased line backup using ISDN
applications 214
length of call, timing 75
length of internal numbers 247
letters, entering with dialpad 33
licensing, background music 201
limiting
access to Norstar 240
telephone feature use 232
telephone programming 232
using alternate or scheduled
services 217
line
access from ISDN terminal 209
assign to Hunt Groups 173
assignment 247
button indicators 248
button moving 161
changing the name 35
changing the name of a line 199
choosing a line 79
choosing autodial 88
describing prime line 251
description of menu 23
for external call forwarding 114
Hunt Group busy line setting 176
indicators, description 44
line redirection, describing 118
picking up calls 247
pool 80–81
Redirection, canceling 119
Redirection, using 118–123
remote access to the system 239
replying to messages 130
retrieving a parked call 106
speed dial 32
target line 248
unassigning Hunt Groups 173
using line button to answer call 44
Line 001 waiting 258
line appearances
using SWCA keys 108
line button
assignment 247
bypassing the Hotline button 230
CAP 48
joining call 74
moving 161
privacy 74
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
Line denied 62, 78, 260
Line hung up 105
Line in use 259
line pool
description 80, 249
external lines routing 231
memory button 249
overflow routing 249
programming buttons 147
programming memory button 81
using remote packages to restrict
external access 240
line pool access code
autodial 88
external calls 231
line profile, viewing 245
Line Redirection 121
line redirection
all lines 119
allow programming 120
call forward no answer 115
call fowarding differences 122
programming 118
redirect ring control 120
using 123
Line001 callback 47
Line001 hung up 103
Line001 to prime 47
Line001 transfer 258
LineXXX to prime 47
Link
blocking 235
host system dialing signals 234
program on memory button 235
LIST 165
listening 68
listening on hold 98
log space, programming 142
log, view call log 139
logging a call manually 138
Logit (see Call Log)
long distance call
indicator 257
using COS password 239
Long Tones 237
loop start line, remote access 239
Lunch Sched 223
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 293
M
M7100 telephone
Autodial 88
button defaults 159
Button Inquiry 145
Call Conference 64
Call Queuing 258
Conference Call on hold 66
Conference Call, independent Hold
65
Hold many calls 97
Incoming Line Group button 44, 79
internal numbers 247
line assignment 247
memory buttons 250
one-line display 251
Ring Again 259
special set features 250
Speed Dial programming 92
standard dial 82
Voice Call 135
M7208 telephone
button defaults 158
memory buttons 250
one-line display 251
M7310 telephone 16
button defaults 155
memory buttons 250
viewing line profile 245
viewing set profile 245
M7324 telephone 16
button defaults 157
CAP 48
memory buttons 250
viewing line profile 245
viewing set profile 245
maintaining security 241
Make calls first 260
making calls
dialing modes 82
Handsfree 70
priority call 83
using a line button 79
using line pools 80
using Ring Again 85
with automatic Handsfree 73
managing COS passwords 243
manual, restriction service 218
P0603535 02
member DN, Hunt Groups 171
members
adding to Hunt Groups 171
moving Hunt Group members 172
remove from Hunt Group 171
memory buttons 17
CAP 48
default assignment 150
erasing features 147
indicators 250
Link 235
M7310 156
power off 87
programming feature codes 147
programming with line pool 81
storing autodial numbers 87
menus, top level 23
Message denied 133
Message list 133
Message Reply Enhancement 131
Message to 133
message waiting indicator, analog
telephone 129
messages
alarm messages, recording 253
analog telephone, answer 129
canceling a sent message 130
forwarded to Call Pickup 129
hiding display 162
KIM 129
removing from list 132
replying 130
restoring call indication 162
sending 128
sending, using the display 128
viewing 130, 133
Messages & Calls 133, 143
microphone
muting 70
using correctly 71
Microphone muted 135
MICS, maximum target lines 248
MICS-XC, maximum target lines 248
minutes, set 30
monitoring
answer DNs and answer key 63
calls 248
calls with CAP 50, 54
line pool status 85
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
294 / Index
lines, see also Disconnect
Supervision 246
telephone status 85
transferred calls 112
month, set 30
Move line from 161
Move line to 161
moving
911 service note 199
automatic telephone relocation 199
Hunt Group members 172
line buttons, set lock 232
telephones 199
music
background, licensing 201
turning off 201
mute
assign button 73
button icon 18
button positioning on sets 160
indicators 71
muting the set in Handsfree 70
voice call tones 134
N
name
changing telephone name 199
display, BRI lines 209
Hunt Groups 178
PRI Network Name Display 204
system speed dial 33
name and number blocking
BRI 210
PRI 205
see also ONN 205
needs service, Hospitality 189
Network Call Diversion 213
Network Name Display
available features 204
BRI 209
PRI 204
New calls begin 143
night control phone (see control
telephone)
Night Sched 223
night schedule, restriction service 219
Night Service (see services and ringing
service)
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
9_ 77, 260
no answer, refusing second call 200
No button free 134, 260
No call on 107
No call to park 107
No calls waiting 258
No free lines 260
No info to log 143
No last number 78, 91
No line selected 78, 258, 260
No line to use 121
No log assigned 143
No number saved 95
No number stored 93, 134
No response 212
No resume item 143
No services ON 223
No voice call 136
Norstar system dial tone 242
Norstar telephones
installing 197
mounting on a wall 198
set profile, viewing 245
viewing line profile 245
Not allowed 212
Not available 212, 257
Not in service 78, 103, 105, 118, 258
Not incoming 212
Not subscribed 212
numbers, entering with dialpad 33
O
OK 251
On another call 79, 85
On hold 98
one button dialing (see Autodial)
one-line display
7100 and 7208 sets 251
display button equivalents 251
ONN blocking, BRI 210
outgoing calls
SWCA keys 111
outgoing calls, 2-way DID 205
Outgoing line 121
Outwats, CbC type 206
overflow
call routing 249
expensive route warning 249
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 295
Hunt Group routing 176
set Hunt Groups 177
overlap dialing 213
overlay 15, 19, 22, 305
OVERRIDE 251
overriding
Call Forward 114
services, manually 223
P
page
default button 159
external equipment 128
making an announcement 125
programming 126
shortcut codes 125
types 125
zones, programming 126
Page choice 127
Page timeout 127
Paging ALL 127
Paging busy 127
Park denied 107
Parked call 258
Parked Call, retrieving 106
Parked on 107
Parking full 108
password
Basic 163, 224
Call Log 141–142
changing 141
Call Log, canceling 142
change COS 243
changing 224, 225
Class of Service 242
clearing Call Log 226
cond pswd 227
description of menu 23
desk 186
desk pswd 227
entering 27
Hospitality 186
hospitality 185
Hospitality password 227
managing COS passwords 243
registration (Companion) 225
room condition 186
security practices 241
P0603535 02
System Coordinator 14, 224
system speed dial code 32
user preferences 163
pause
Host system dialing signals 236
in a sequence of numbers, see Wait
for Dial Tone
PBX
link feature 234
programming Run/Stop dialing
sequence 237
Tie CbC service 206
PBX template
M7208 158
M7310 lower buttons 155
M7324 buttons 157
T7208 158
T7316 buttons 151, 152, 154
personal programming 14
phone 111
Pick up receiver 259
Pickup 61
Pickup denied 61, 62
pickup group, changing 61
Please wait 85
Pool code 121
power failure, clock 31
power off, affect on memory buttons 87
power supply, testing 256
pre-dial 83
pre-printed button caps 150
Press a button 89, 145, 148
Press a line 161
Press held line 67
prevent calls, restriction services 217
PRI
2-way DID 205
Call by Call 206
Dialing Plan 207
DID 203
DOD 203
emergency 911 205
ISDN description 203
name and number blocking 205
Network Name Display 204
prime line
description 251
external call routing 231
standard dial 82
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
296 / Index
system speed dial 32
prime telephone
answering calls 47
CAP 48
direct dial 228
overflow routing 249
TAP 50
using DND 200
priority call
exclusive hold 84
see also Call Queuing 43, 83
Priority denied 85
Priority>223 259
privacy
changing status 74
conference call 64
creating conference call 75
set lock 232
private
branch exchange, accessing from
Norstar (see also host system
dialing signals) 234
call 75
CbC type 206
private dialing plan, Call by Call 206
private line, description 252
Private name 59, 204, 209
private network, enblock dialing 207
Private number 59
Program and HOLD 89, 93, 148
Program and OK 89, 93, 148
Programmed 89
Programmed Release, host system
dialing signals 237
programming
administration programming 14
administration set 15
alarm feature, Hospitality 191
alarms 192
auxiliary ringer 233
Basic password 14
basics 14
broadcast mode 174
busy line setting 176
Call Display 58
Call Forward 37, 40
Call Forward delay 115
call forward on busy 39
Call Pickup 59
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
call restrictions, Hospitality 188
CAP 49
changes, planning 15
changing buttons, users 164
changing the name of a line 35
changing the name of a telephone
34, 199
check DNs 27
condition password 186
customizing your Norstar 14
direct-dial telephones 229
entering passwords 27
external autodial button 87
features on buttons 147
Forward no answer 115
group pickup 60
Handsfree 72
Handsfree Answerback 73
hospitality cond password 227
hospitality desk password 227
hospitality password 227
Hospitality passwords 185
Hotline telephone 230
hunt delay 175
installer programming 14
KIM 53
line redirection 118
Link 234
log space 142
Long Tones 236
overflow set, Hunt Groups 177
overlay 15
page zone 126
paging 126
Pause 236
personal programming 14
programmed release 237
programming indicatorª 20
programming indicatorº 20
programming map 23–27
programming overlay 19
queue timeout 177
recording changes 14
Restriction service 217, 218
Ringing service 217
room/desk information 187
Routing service 218
Run/Stop dialing signal 237
service times, Hospitality 188
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 297
Set lock 232
set lock 233
starting and ending a session 27–
28
system and user speed dial 91
System Coordinator 27
system speed dial 31
telephones
Call Forward, do not disturb 40
Do Not Disturb 200
Do Not Disturb on Busy 40
priority call 83
time and date 29
top-level menu description 23
user preferences 163
User Speed Dial 92
Wait for Dial Tone signal 238
programming record 14
programming telephones
block Link 235
blocking Redial 95
Last Number Redial 90
public network
dialing plan, PRI 207
enblock dialing 207
remote access to Norstar 241
Public, CbC type 206
pulse dialing
selecting on the set 238
switching 246
Q
query alarm 192
queue
Hunt Group routing 176
Hunt Group timeout 177
QUIT 251
R
recording alarm codes 253
recording changes 14
redial
last number 90
saved number 94
Redir by 121
redirect ring, programming 120
Redirect denied122
redirection
P0603535 02
all lines 119
cancelling 119
lines 118
loops, avoiding 123
programming 118
ring control 120
using 123
refusing to answer second call 200
Registration password 225
Release a call 105, 259
Release button
55
icons 18
Release calls 259
releasing
accidentally 76
from conference 66
relocation, automatic relocation,
telephones 199
remote access 239–241
change COS password 243
fast busy tone 242
loop start line 239
managing COS passwords 243
security 240
stuttered dial tone 242
system dial tone 242
through public network 241
tones 242
usiing ISDN with LAN 214
using COS password 240
remove
from a conference call 66
Hunt Group members 171
message, analog telephone 132
messages 132
replying to a message
analog telephone 131
digital phone 130
reporting alarm codes 253
Restr’n 222
Restricted call 79, 103, 260
restricting
access to Norstar 240
access using COS password 240
feature use, see Set Lock
telephone feature use 232
telephone programming 232
¨
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
298 / Index
using alternate or scheduled
services 217
restriction service
control telephone 221
filters, COS for remote access calls
242
naming 219
Night schedule 219
preventing calls 217
turning off/on 218
retrieval codes, Call Park 106
retrieving
held call 97
parked call 106
ring
auxiliary ringer 233
changing ring type 162, 167
changing the number of rings
before call is forwarded 38
description of types 45, 162
ring volume setting 162
Ringing service 219
rotary mode 174
sequential 174
simultaneous rings 174
Ring Again 85
7100 series terminals 259
set lock 232
Ring Again? 79, 86
ring delay, call fowarding 117
Ringing 222
ringing
distinctive ring patterns 46
ringing service
restriction services 217
Trunk Answer 62
rings
change number for call forward 38
setting Hunt Group delay 175
room
setting condition 189
using room programming 189
room information, programming 187
room set
description 185
using 190
rooms set
call restrictions 188
rotary mode, Hunt Groups 174
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
Routing 222
routing
2-way DID 205
external lines 231
Hunt Group routing options 176
overflow 249
routing service
control telephone 221
outgoing calls 218
overflow routing 249
run/stop, host system dialing signals 237
S
saved number redial
set lock 232
using 94
Sched 4 223
Sched 5 223
Sched 6 223
scheduled services 217
schedules, viewing active 221
second call, refusing 200
security
managing COS passwords 243
practices 241
system 240
using COS password 240
using DISA 240
Select a line 79, 93
Select line out 122
Select line(s) 122
Send message? 79
sending messages
set lock 232
using feature 128
sent message, cancelling 130
sequential mode, Hunt Groups 174
Service
control telephone 221
overflow routing 249
routing service 218
turn off 221
turn on manually 219
service done, Hospitality 189
Service Modes, see Services
service provider features
911 service 199
Automatic Call Back 211
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 299
Automatic Recall 211
Call Forward 210
call information 137
calling the forwarded numbe 211
canceling Call Forward 211
Service Schedules
Evening Sched 223
Lunch Sched 223
Night Sched 223
Sched 4 223
Sched 5 223
Sched 6 223
service times, Hospitality 188
Services
description of menu 23
display indicator for active services
223
overriding 223
Restriction service 217
Ringing service 217
set lock 232
Trunk Answer 62
turning off and on using feature
codes 220
turning off/on 218
using control telephone to set 217
viewing active schedules 221
Services ON 223
set
date 30
types of Hospitality sets 185
using administration set 190
using room set 190
using set programming 189
Set Lock
Full 232
limiting access to features 232
partial 232
programming 233
using 232–233
Set locked 257
set profile, viewing 245
SHOW 251
Show set 34
signal
Link 234
Long Tones 236
Pause 236
Programmed Release 237
P0603535 02
run/stop 237
Wait for Dial Tone 238
simultaneous ring, Hunt Groups 174
snooze, delaying alarm 194
speakers
telephone, testing 256
voice call 134
special telephones 228
speed dial
7100 sets 92
add/change number 32
changing user buttons 165
choosing a system code 32
code 92
display 33
entering name 33
making a call 92
programming for User 92
selecting a line 32
system programming 31
using 91
splitting a Conference Call 66
square template
M7208 158
M7310 lower buttons 155
M7324 buttons 157
T7208 158
T7316 buttons 151, 152, 154
standard dial
prime line 82
selecting a line 82
Start of list 134
Still in trnsfer 104
stop calls from ringing at set 200
stuttered dial tone 240, 242
suspending a call
see also Call Park and Hold
using Call Park 106
SWCA
no free call keys 111
using 108
system access, changing programming
passwords 224
system code, system speed dial 32
System Coordinator
maintaining 911 records 205
password 14
programming 27
Restriction and routing service 221
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
300 / Index
system dial tone 242
system monitor telephone
using 232
System prgrming, description of menu
23
system speed dial
add or change number 32
description 91
description of menu Sys speed dial
23
display numbers 33
host system signaling codes 91
name 33
select a line 32
system time and date, change 225
T
T7100 Business Series Terminal
autodial 88
button defaults 159
Button Inquiry 145
Call Conference 64
Call Queuing 258
Conference Call on hold 66
Conference Call, independent Hold
65
Hold many calls 97
Incoming Line Group button 79
internal numbers 247
line assignment 247
memory buttons 250
one-line display 251
Ring Again 259
special set features 250
Speed Dial programming 92
standard dial 82
Voice Call 135
T7208 Business Series Terminal
button defaults 158
memory buttons 250
one-line display 251
T7316 Business Series Terminal
administration set 16
button defaults 151, 153
memory buttons 250
overlay 21
viewing line profile 245
viewing set profile 245
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
T7316E
TAP 50
talking in turn, Handsfree feature 71
TAP
answering calls 50
prime telephone 50
telephone 50
using 50
target line
changing the name 199
description 248
maximum 248
overflow 249
target lines
moving on telephone 161
TEL# 165
telecommuting using ISDN applications
214
telephone
7100 special set features 250
911 199, 205
accessing external voice mail 144
adjusting the display contrast 146
administration display 17
administration sets, illustration 16
alarm 253
announcement 134
answer message on analog
telephone 129
answer prime telephone 47
answering voice call 135
assigning lines 247
automatic relocation 199
auxiliary ringer 233
blocking link 235
blocking redial feature 95
button inquiry 145
buttons 17
bypassing the Hotline set 230
Call Display information 58
call forward 37
call iinformation 56
call indicators 45
call log, viewing 139
cancel a sent message 130
cancel DND 200
cancel voice call 135
CAP 48, 228
changing direct dial telephone 229
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 301
changing line name 199
changing set name 199
changing the name 34
control service schedules 231
control set 221
default button assingment 150
denying voice call 135
dialpad buttons 17
direct-dial 228
directed pickup 59
disconnect supervision 246
display buttons 19
display call information 57
DND 200
ending test session 254
erasing call log items 140
extra-dial 220, 223, 228
Feature button 17, 18
group pickup 60
handsfree button 18
hiding display 162
Hold button 17, 18
Hold call information 57
Hospitality administration set 190
Hospitality room set 190
Hospitality service sets 185
Hotline 230
Hunt Group overflow set 177
installing BST sets 195
installing Norstar sets 197
last number redial 90
line profile, viewing 245
log calls automatically 137
logging call manually 138
Long Tones 236
making calls from ISDN terminal 82
memory buttons 17
moving custom programming 199
mute 18, 70, 134
name display 199
Norstar telephone overlay 22
prime 228
programming paging 126
pulse dialing 238
refusing second call 200
Release button 17, 18
remove messages 132
replying to a message 130
retrieving a parked call 106
P0603535 02
ring indicators 45
sending messages 128
sent messages, viewing 133
setting up a hotline 230
stop ringing using DND 200
system monitor, hunt groups 232
system speed dial 31
T7316E and KIM 50
testing 254–256
turn off music 201
using background music 201
viewing messages 130
viewing set profile 245
volume control 18
telephone speakers, testing 256
telephones
set lock 232
template, button assignments 151, 153
Terminal Answering Position (see TAP)
terminal connections, BST sets 195
Terminals&Sets, description 23
testing
buttons 254, 255
ending session 254
telephone 254
Their list full 134
3 parties only 67
Tie, CbC type 206
time
change 225
service times, Hospitality 188
time and date
225
29
806 133
changing 29
displaying 76
hiding message indication 162
length of a call 75
time savers
autodial 87
Saved Number Redial 94
Speed Dial 91
Time&Date, description of menu 23
timeout, Hunt Group queues 177
tones
camped call tones 104
controlling length 236
dialing, switching 246
² ¥¥æé÷ä
²¥¥æé÷ä
²
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
302 / Index
expensive route 249
fast busy, remote access 242
remote access tones 242
stuttered dial tone, remote access
242
system dial tone 242
voice call 134
top-level menus 23
tracking incoming calls, Call Log 137
transfer
calls, monitoring 112
cancelling 103
see Call Transfer
Transfer denied 104
transferring calls 101
Callback 112
parking a call 106
using Camp-on 104
troubleshooting
reporting and recording alarms 253
testing handset speaker 255
testing telephone buttons 255
testing telephone display 254
testing telephone speaker 256
testing the headset 255
testing the power supply 256
using the alarm telephone 253
Trunk Answer
feature 62
picking up calls 247
set lock 232
turning off background music 201
change how calls are dialed 166
change languages on display 167
change ring type 167
changing button programming 164
changing speed dial 165
display buttons 165
password 163
subheadings 164
user call log options 166
user programming 14
user speed dial
changing 165
description 91
programming 92
set lock 232
using
alarms 193
background music 201
Call Forward 114
Call Log 137
DND 200
Do Not Disturb 200
Hospitality administration set 190
Hunt Groups 169
Last Number Redial 90
line redirection 123
Link 234
name and number blocking 205
Norstar remotely 239–241
the room set 190
this guide 13
V
U
unassigning lines, Hunt Groups 173
Unequipped line 122
Unknown name 59, 204, 209
Unknown name 142
Unknown number 59
Unknown number 93
until * 222
Use line pool? 259
Use prime line 32
User Preferences 163–168
225
user preferences
Basic password 163
change display contrast 167
²¥¥èêäå
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
videoconferencing, using ISDN
applications 213
VIEW 251
viewing
active Services 221
Call Log 139
messages 130, 133
Voice Call 134–135
answering 135
cancel 135
deny 135
Voice call 135
Voice Call Deny, set lock 232
voice mail
accessing your Norstar system 144
P0603535 02
StandardTele.com
Index / 303
using Call Forward 117
voice message center, viewing messages 130
volume
bar, description 252
button 18
set control 252
W
Wait for Dial Tone, Host system dialing signals 238
wake-up
cancel alarm 194
setting alarm 191
turn off alarm 194
using sets 193
wall mounting
BST sets 196
Norstar sets 198
Y
year, set 30
Your list full 134
P0603535 02
Page 303 of 304
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
304 / Index
P0603535 02
Page 304 of 304
Modular ICS 6.1 System Coordinator Guide
StandardTele.com
Backup programming overlays
Heading
Back
Show
Next
T7316E
Heading
Back
Show
Next
T7316
Business
Series
Terminals
Programming
Record
Norstar Programming Overlay
Heading
Show
Back
Next
StandardTele.com
After you have finished programming, store
your Norstar Programming Overlay in the slots
provided on the back cover.
Après avoir terminé la programmation, rangez
la grille Norstar dans les fentes prévues à cet
effet à la fin de ce guide.
Cuando haya terminado de programar, inserte
en estas ranuras su Plantilla de programación
Norstar que se encuentra en la contra tapa.

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project